ATMEGA161-4AC [ATMEL]

8-bit Microcontroller with 16K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash; 8位微控制器,带有16K字节的系统内可编程闪存
ATMEGA161-4AC
型号: ATMEGA161-4AC
厂家: ATMEL    ATMEL
描述:

8-bit Microcontroller with 16K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
8位微控制器,带有16K字节的系统内可编程闪存

闪存 微控制器和处理器 外围集成电路 异步传输模式 ATM 时钟
文件: 总134页 (文件大小:2127K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Features  
High-performance, Low-power AVR® 8-bit Microcontroller  
Advanced RISC Architecture  
– 130 Powerful Instructions - Most Single Clock Cycle Execution  
– 32 x 8 General Purpose Working Registers  
– Fully Static Operation  
– Up to 8 MIPS Throughput at 8 MHz  
– On-chip 2-cycle Multiplier  
Program and Data Memories  
16K Bytes of Nonvolatile In-System Programmable Flash  
Endurance: 1,000 Write/Erase Cycles  
8-bit  
Optional Boot Code Memory with Independent Lock Bits  
Self-programming of Program and Data Memories  
512 Bytes Nonvolatile In-System Programmable EEPROM  
Endurance: 100,000 Write/Erase Cycles  
1K Bytes Internal SRAM  
Microcontroller  
with 16K Bytes  
In-System  
Programmable  
Flash  
Programming Lock for Software Security  
Peripheral Features  
Two 8-bit Timer/Counters with Separate Prescaler and PWM  
Expanded 16-bit Timer/Counter System with Separate Prescaler, Compare,  
Capture Modes and Dual 8-, 9- or 10-bit PWM  
Dual Programmable Serial UARTs  
Master/Slave SPI Serial Interface  
Real Time Counter with Separate Oscillator  
Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator  
On-chip Analog Comparator  
ATmega161  
Special Microcontroller Features  
Power-on Reset and Programmable Brown-out Detection  
External and Internal Interrupt Sources  
Three Sleep Modes: Idle, Power Save and Power-down  
I/O and Packages  
ATmega161L  
35 Programmable I/O Lines  
40-pin PDIP, 44-pin PLCC and TQFP  
Operating Voltages  
Advance  
Information  
2.7V - 5.5V (ATmega161L), 4.0V - 5.5V (ATmega161)  
Speed Grades  
0 - 4 MHz (ATmega161L), 0 - 8 MHz (ATmega161)  
Commercial and Industrial Temperature Ranges  
Rev. 1228A08/99  
Pin Configurations  
PDIP  
(OC0/T0) PB0  
(OC2/T1) PB1  
(RXD1/AIN0) PB2  
(TXD1/AIN1) PB3  
(SS) PB4  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
40 VCC  
39 PA0 (AD0)  
38 PA1 (AD1)  
37 PA2 (AD2)  
36 PA3 (AD3)  
35 PA4 (AD4)  
34 PA5 (AD5)  
33 PA6 (AD6)  
32 PA7 (AD7)  
31 PE0 (ICP/INT2)  
30 PE1 (ALE)  
29 PE2 (OC1B)  
28 PC7 (A15)  
27 PC6 (A14)  
26 PC5 (A13)  
25 PC4 (A12)  
24 PC3 (A11)  
23 PC2 (A10)  
22 PC1 (A9)  
21 PC0 (A8)  
(MOSI) PB5  
(MISO) PB6  
(SCK) PB7  
RESET  
(RXD0) PD0 10  
(TXD0) PD1 11  
(INT0) PD2 12  
(INT1) PD3 13  
(TOSC1) PD4 14  
(OC1A/TOSC2) PD5 15  
(WR) PD6 16  
(RD) PD7 17  
TQFP  
PLCC  
XTAL2 18  
XTAL1 19  
GND 20  
(MOSI) PB5  
(MISO) PB6  
(SCK) PB7  
7
8
9
39 PA4 (AD4)  
38 PA5 (AD5)  
37 PA6 (AD6)  
36 PA7 (AD7)  
35 PE0 (ICP/INT2)  
34 NC*  
(MOSI) PB5  
(MISO) PB6  
(SCK) PB7  
RESET  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
33 PA4 (AD4)  
32 PA5 (AD5)  
31 PA6 (AD6)  
30 PA7 (AD7)  
29 PE0 (ICP/INT2)  
28 NC*  
RESET 10  
(RXD0) PD0 11  
NC* 12  
(RXD0) PD0  
NC*  
(TXD0) PD1 13  
(INT0) PD2 14  
33 PE1 (ALE)  
32 PE2 (OC1B)  
31 PC7 (A15)  
30 PC6 (A14)  
29 PC5 (A13)  
(TXD0) PD1  
(INT0) PD2  
(INT1) PD3  
27 PE1 (ALE)  
26 PE2 (OC1B)  
25 PC7 (A15)  
24 PC6 (A14)  
23 PC5 (A13)  
(INT1) PD3 15  
(TOSC1) PD4 16  
(OC1A/TOSC2) PD5 17  
(TOSC1) PD4 10  
(OCIA/TOSC2) PD5 11  
* NC  
= Do not connect  
(Can be used in future devices)  
* NC  
= Do not connect  
(Can be used in future devices)  
Description  
The ATmega161 is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR RISC architecture. By executing powerful  
instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATmega161 achieves throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz allowing the sys-  
tem designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed.The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with  
32 general purpose working registers. All the 32 registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU),  
allowing two independent registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting  
architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than conventional CISC  
microcontrollers.  
The ATmega161 provides the following features: 16K bytes of In-System- or Self-programmable Flash, 512 bytes  
EEPROM, 1K bytes SRAM, 35 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers, Real Time Counter, three  
flexible timer/counters with compare modes, internal and external interrupts, two programmable serial UARTs, programma-  
ble Watchdog Timer with internal oscillator, an SPI serial port and three software selectable power saving modes. The Idle  
mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM, timer/counters, SPI port and interrupt system to continue functioning. The  
power-down mode saves the register and SRAM contents but freezes the oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until  
the next external interrupt or hardware reset. In Power Save mode, the timer oscillator continues to run, allowing the user to  
maintain a timer base while the rest of the device is sleeping.  
The device is manufactured using Atmels high density nonvolatile memory technology. The on-chip Flash program mem-  
ory can be reprogrammed using the self-programming capability through the bootblock, using an ISP through the SPI-port,  
or by using a conventional nonvolatile memory programmer. By combining an enhanced RISC 8-bit CPU with In-System  
Programmable Flash on a monolithic chip, the Atmel ATmega161 is a powerful microcontroller that provides a highly  
flexible and cost effective solution to many embedded control applications.  
The ATmega161 AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development tools including: C compilers,  
macro assemblers, program debugger/simulators, in-circuit emulators, and evaluation kits.  
ATmega161(L)  
2
ATmega161(L)  
Block Diagram  
Figure 1. The ATmega161 Block Diagram  
PA0-PA7  
PC0-PC7  
VCC  
PORTA DRIVERS  
PORTC DRIVERS  
GND  
DATA REGISTER  
PORTA  
DATA DIR.  
REG. PORTA  
DATA REGISTER  
PORTC  
DATA DIR.  
REG. PORTC  
8-BIT DATA BUS  
XTAL1  
INTERNAL  
OSCILLATOR  
OSCILLATOR  
XTAL2  
RESET  
PROGRAM  
COUNTER  
STACK  
POINTER  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
TIMING AND  
CONTROL  
PROGRAM  
FLASH  
MCU CONTROL  
REGISTER  
SRAM  
INSTRUCTION  
REGISTER  
GENERAL  
PURPOSE  
REGISTERS  
TIMER/  
COUNTERS  
X
Y
Z
INSTRUCTION  
DECODER  
INTERRUPT  
UNIT  
CONTROL  
LINES  
ALU  
EEPROM  
STATUS  
REGISTER  
PROGRAMMING  
LOGIC  
UARTS  
SPI  
DATA DIR  
REG. PORTE  
DATA REG.  
PORTE  
DATA REGISTER  
PORTD  
DATA DIR.  
REG. PORTD  
DATA REGISTER  
PORTB  
DATA DIR.  
REG. PORTB  
PORTE DRIVERS  
PORTD DRIVERS  
PORTB DRIVERS  
PB0 - PB7  
PE0 - PE2  
PD0 - PD7  
3
Pin Descriptions  
VCC  
Supply voltage  
GND  
Ground  
Port A (PA7..PA0)  
Port A is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port. Port pins can provide internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port A  
output buffers can sink 20 mA and can drive LED displays directly. When pins PA0 to PA7 are used as inputs and are  
externally pulled low, they will source current if the internal pull-up resistors are activated. The Port A pins are tri-stated  
when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port A serves as Multiplexed Address/Data port when using external memory interface.  
Port B (PB7..PB0)  
Port B is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors. The Port B output buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs,  
Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port B pins are  
tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega161 as listed on page 80.  
Port C (PC7..PC0)  
Port C is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors. The Port C output buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs,  
Port C pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port C pins are  
tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port C also serves as Address high output when using external memory interface.  
Port D (PD7..PD0)  
Port D is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors. The Port D output buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs,  
Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port D pins are  
tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port D also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega161 as listed on page 87.  
Port E (PE2..PE0)  
Port E is a 3-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors. The Port E output buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs,  
Port E pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port E pins are  
tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port E also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega161 as listed on page 93.  
RESET  
Reset input. A low level on this pin for more than 500 ns will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter  
pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset.  
XTAL1  
Input to the inverting oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit.  
XTAL2  
Output from the inverting oscillator amplifier  
ATmega161(L)  
4
ATmega161(L)  
Crystal Oscillator  
XTAL1 and XTAL2 are input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier which can be configured for use as an  
on-chip oscillator, as shown in Figure 2. Either a quartz crystal or a ceramic resonator may be used. To drive the device  
from an external clock source, XTAL2 should be left unconnected while XTAL1 is driven as shown in Figure 3.  
Figure 2. Oscillator Connections  
MAX 1 HC BUFFER  
HC  
C2  
XTAL2  
C1  
XTAL1  
GND  
Note:  
When using the MCU Oscillator as a clock for an external device, an HC buffer should be connected as indicated in the figure.  
Figure 3. External Clock Drive Configuration  
5
 
 
Architectural Overview  
The fast-access register file concept contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single clock cycle access  
time. This means that during one single clock cycle, one Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation is executed. Two operands  
are output from the register file, the operation is executed, and the result is stored back in the register file in one clock  
cycle.  
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bits indirect address register pointers for Data Space addressing enabling  
efficient address calculations. One of the three address pointers is also used as the address pointer for the constant table  
look up function. These added function registers are the 16-bits X-register, Y-register and Z-register.  
Figure 4. The ATmega161 AVR RISC Architecture  
AVR ATmega161 Architecture  
Data Bus 8-bit  
Program  
Counter  
Status  
and Control  
Interrupt  
Unit  
8K x 16  
Program  
Memory  
SPI  
Unit  
32 x 8  
General  
Purpose  
Registers  
Instruction  
Register  
Serial  
UART0  
Instruction  
Decoder  
Serial  
UART1  
ALU  
Control Lines  
8-bit  
Timer/Counter  
with PWM  
and RTC  
16-bit  
Timer/Counter  
with PWM  
1024 x 8  
Data  
SRAM  
8-bit  
Timer/Counter  
with PWM  
512 x 8  
EEPROM  
Watchdog  
Timer  
32  
I/O Lines  
Analog  
Comparator  
ATmega161(L)  
6
 
ATmega161(L)  
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic functions between registers or between a constant and a register. Single register  
operations are also executed in the ALU. Figure 4 shows the ATmega161 AVR RISC microcontroller architecture.  
In addition to the register operation, the conventional memory addressing modes can be used on the register file as well.  
This is enabled by the fact that the register file is assigned the 32 lowermost Data Space addresses ($00 - $1F), allowing  
them to be accessed as though they were ordinary memory locations.  
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Registers, Timer/Counters, and  
other I/O functions. The I/O Memory can be accessed directly, or as the Data Space locations following those of the regis-  
ter file, $20 - $5F.  
The AVR uses a Harvard architecture concept with separate memories and buses for program and data. The program  
memory is executed with a two stage pipeline. While one instruction is being executed, the next instruction is pre-fetched  
from the program memory. This concept enables instructions to be executed in every clock cycle. The program memory is  
Self-programmable Flash memory.  
With the jump and call instructions, the whole 8K word address space is directly accessed. Most AVR instructions have a  
single 16-bit word format. Every program memory address contains a 16- or 32-bit instruction.  
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address program counter (PC) is stored on the stack. The stack is effec-  
tively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the stack size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the  
usage of the SRAM. All user programs must initialize the SP (Stack Pointer) in the reset routine (before subroutines or  
interrupts are executed). The 16-bit stack pointer is read/write accessible in the I/O space.  
The 1K bytes data SRAM can be easily accessed through the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR  
architecture.  
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.  
7
Figure 5. Memory Maps  
Program Memory  
Data Memory  
$0000  
$000  
32 Gen. Purpose  
Working Registers  
$001F  
$0020  
64 I/O Registers  
Program Flash  
(8K x 16)  
$005F  
$0060  
Internal SRAM  
(1024 x 8)  
$045F  
$0460  
External SRAM  
(0-63K x 8)  
$1FFF  
$FFFF  
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional global interrupt enable bit in the status  
register. All the different interrupts have a separate interrupt vector in the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the  
program memory. The different interrupts have priority in accordance with their interrupt vector position. The lower the  
interrupt vector address, the higher the priority.  
ATmega161(L)  
8
ATmega161(L)  
General Purpose Register File  
Figure 6 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.  
Figure 6. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers  
7
0
Addr.  
R0  
R1  
$00  
$01  
$02  
R2  
R13  
R14  
R15  
R16  
R17  
$0D  
$0E  
$0F  
$10  
$11  
General  
Purpose  
Working  
Registers  
R26  
R27  
R28  
R29  
R30  
R31  
$1A  
$1B  
$1C  
$1D  
$1E  
$1F  
X-register low byte  
X-register high byte  
Y-register low byte  
Y-register high byte  
Z-register low byte  
Z-register high byte  
All the register operating instructions in the instruction set have direct and single cycle access to all registers. The only  
exceptions are the five constant arithmetic and logic instructions SBCI, SUBI, CPI, ANDI, and ORI between a constant and  
a register, and the LDI instruction for load immediate constant data. These instructions apply to the second half of the reg-  
isters in the register file R16..R31. The general SBC, SUB, CP, AND, and OR, and all other operations between two  
registers or on a single register apply to the entire register file.  
As shown in Figure 6, each register is also assigned a data memory address, mapping them directly into the first 32 loca-  
tions of the user Data Space. Although not being physically implemented as SRAM locations, this memory organization  
provides great flexibility in access of the registers, as the X, Y and Z-registers can be set to index any register in the file.  
X-register, Y-register, and Z-register  
The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These registers are address pointers  
for indirect addressing of the Data Space. The three indirect address registers X, Y and Z are defined as:  
Figure 7. X, Y and Z-registers  
15  
7
0
X-register  
0
7
0
R27 ($1B)  
R26 ($1A)  
15  
7
0
Y-register  
Z-register  
0
0
7
7
0
R29 ($1D)  
R31 ($1F)  
R28 ($1C)  
R30 ($1E)  
15  
7
0
0
In the different addressing modes, these address registers have functions as fixed displacement, automatic increment and  
decrement (see the descriptions for the different instructions).  
9
 
ALU Arithmetic Logic Unit  
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose working registers. Within a  
single clock cycle, ALU operations between registers in the register file are executed. The ALU operations are divided into  
three main categories arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. ATmega161 does also provide a powerful multiplier support-  
ing both signed/unsigned multiplication and fractional format. See Instruction Set section for a detailed description.  
Self-programmable Flash Program Memory  
The ATmega161 contains 16K bytes on-chip Self- and In-System programmable Flash memory for program storage. Since  
all instructions are 16- or 32-bit words, the Flash is organized as 8K x 16. The Flash memory has an endurance of at least  
1000 write/erase cycles. The ATmega161 Program Counter (PC) is 13 bits wide, thus addressing the 8192 program  
memory locations.  
See page 95 for a detailed description on Flash data downloading.  
See page 11 for the different program memory addressing modes.  
EEPROM Data Memory  
The ATmega161 contains 512 bytes of data EEPROM memory. It is organized as a separate data space, in which single  
bytes can be read and written. The EEPROM has an endurance of at least 100,000 write/erase cycles per location. The  
interface between the EEPROM and the CPU is described on page 54 specifying the EEPROM address registers, the  
EEPROM data register, and the EEPROM control register.  
For the SPI data downloading, see page 109 for a detailed description.  
Figure 8. SRAM Organization  
Register File  
Data Address Space  
R0  
R1  
R2  
º
$0000  
$0001  
$0002  
º
R29  
R30  
$001D  
$001E  
$001F  
R31  
I/O Registers  
$00  
$0020  
$0021  
$0022  
$01  
$02  
$3D  
$3E  
$3F  
$005D  
$005E  
$005F  
Internal SRAM  
$0060  
$0061  
º
$045E  
$045F  
ATmega161(L)  
10  
 
ATmega161(L)  
SRAM Data Memory  
Figure 8 shows how the ATmega161 SRAM Memory is organized.  
The lower 1120 Data Memory locations address the Register file, the I/O Memory and the internal data SRAM. The first 96  
locations address the Register File and I/O Memory, and the next 1K locations address the internal data SRAM. An  
optional external data memory device can be placed in the same SRAM memory space. This memory device will occupy  
the locations following the internal SRAM and up to as much as 64K - 1, depending on external memory size.  
When the addresses accessing the data memory space exceeds the internal data SRAM locations, the memory device is  
accessed using the same instructions as for the internal data SRAM access. When the internal data space is accessed, the  
read and write strobe pins (RD and WR) are inactive during the whole access cycle. External memory operation is enabled  
by setting the SRE bit in the MCUCR register. See Interface to external memoryon page 72 for details.  
Accessing external memory takes one additional clock cycle per byte compared to access of the internal SRAM. This  
means that the commands LD, ST, LDS, STS, PUSH and POP take one additional clock cycle. If the stack is placed in  
external memory, interrupts, subroutine calls and returns take two clock cycles extra because the two-byte program  
counter is pushed and popped. When external memory interface is used with wait state, two additional clock cycles is used  
per byte. This has the following effect: Data transfer instructions take two extra clock cycles, whereas interrupt, subroutine  
calls and returns will need four clock cycles more than specified in the instruction set manual.  
The five different addressing modes for the data memory cover: Direct, Indirect with Displacement, Indirect, Indirect with  
Pre-Decrement, and Indirect with Post-Increment. In the register file, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect addressing  
pointer registers.  
The direct addressing reaches the entire data space.  
The Indirect with Displacement mode features a 63 address locations reach from the base address given by the Y or  
Z-register.  
When using register indirect addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and post-increment, the address registers X,  
Y and Z are decremented and incremented.  
The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O registers and the 1K bytes of internal data SRAM in the ATmega161 are  
all accessible through all these addressing modes.  
See the next section for a detailed description of the different addressing modes.  
Program and Data Addressing Modes  
The ATmega161 AVR RISC microcontroller supports powerful and efficient addressing modes for access to the program  
memory (Flash) and data memory (SRAM, Register File, and I/O Memory). This section describes the different addressing  
modes supported by the AVR architecture. In the figures, OP means the operation code part of the instruction word. To  
simplify, not all figures show the exact location of the addressing bits.  
11  
Register Direct, Single Register Rd  
Figure 9. Direct Single Register Addressing  
The operand is contained in register d (Rd).  
Register Direct, Two Registers Rd and Rr  
Figure 10. Direct Register Addressing, Two Registers  
Operands are contained in register r (Rr) and d (Rd). The result is stored in register d (Rd).  
ATmega161(L)  
12  
ATmega161(L)  
I/O Direct  
Figure 11. I/O Direct Addressing  
Operand address is contained in 6 bits of the instruction word. n is the destination or source register address.  
Data Direct  
Figure 12. Direct Data Addressing  
Data Space  
$0000  
20 19  
31  
15  
16  
0
OP  
Rr/Rd  
16 LSBs  
$FFFF  
A 16-bit Data Address is contained in the 16 LSBs of a two-word instruction. Rd/Rr specify the destination or source  
register.  
13  
Data Indirect with Displacement  
Figure 13. Data Indirect with Displacement  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
Y OR Z - REGISTER  
15  
10  
6 5  
0
OP  
n
a
$FFFF  
Operand address is the result of the Y or Z-register contents added to the address contained in 6 bits of the  
instruction word.  
Data Indirect  
Figure 14. Data Indirect Addressing  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
X, Y, OR Z - REGISTER  
$FFFF  
Operand address is the contents of the X, Y, or the Z-register.  
ATmega161(L)  
14  
ATmega161(L)  
Data Indirect with Pre-Decrement  
Figure 15. Data Indirect Addressing with Pre-Decrement  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
X, Y, OR Z - REGISTER  
-1  
$FFFF  
The X, Y, or the Z-register is decremented before the operation. Operand address is the decremented contents of the X, Y,  
or the Z-register.  
Data Indirect with Post-Increment  
Figure 16. Data Indirect Addressing with Post-Increment  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
X, Y, OR Z - REGISTER  
1
$FFFF  
The X, Y, or the Z-register is incremented after the operation. Operand address is the content of the X, Y, or the Z-register  
prior to incrementing.  
15  
Constant Addressing Using the LPM Instruction  
Figure 17. Code Memory Constant Addressing  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$000  
$1FFF  
Constant byte address is specified by the Z-register contents. The 15 MSBs select word address (0 - 8K), the LSB selects  
low byte if cleared (LSB = 0) or high byte if set (LSB = 1).  
Indirect Program Addressing, IJMP and ICALL  
Figure 18. Indirect Program Memory Addressing  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$000  
$1FFF  
Program execution continues at address contained by the Z-register (i.e. the PC is loaded with the contents of the  
Z-register).  
ATmega161(L)  
16  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Relative Program Addressing, RJMP and RCALL  
Figure 19. Relative Program Memory Addressing  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$000  
$1FFF  
Program execution continues at address PC + k + 1. The relative address k is -2048 to 2047.  
Direct Program Addressing, JMP and CALL  
Figure 20. Direct Program Addressing  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$0000  
31  
15  
16  
0
21 20  
OP  
16 LSBs  
$1FFF  
Program execution continues at the address immediate in the instruction words.  
17  
Memory Access Times and Instruction Execution Timing  
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution and internal memory access.  
The AVR CPU is driven by the System Clock Ø, directly generated from the external clock crystal for the chip. No internal  
clock division is used.  
Figure 21 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the Harvard architecture and the  
fast-access register file concept. This is the basic pipelining concept to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with the corresponding  
unique results for functions per cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.  
Figure 21. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
1st Instruction Fetch  
1st Instruction Execute  
2nd Instruction Fetch  
2nd Instruction Execute  
3rd Instruction Fetch  
3rd Instruction Execute  
4th Instruction Fetch  
Figure 22 shows the internal timing concept for the register file. In a single clock cycle an ALU operation using two register  
operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destination register.  
Figure 22. Single Cycle ALU Operation  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
Total Execution Time  
Register Operands Fetch  
ALU Operation Execute  
Result Write Back  
The internal data SRAM access is performed in two System Clock cycles as described in Figure 23.  
Figure 23. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
Prev. Address  
Address  
Address  
Data  
WR  
Data  
RD  
ATmega161(L)  
18  
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
I/O Memory  
The I/O space definition of the ATmega161 is shown in the following table:  
Table 1. ATmega161 I/O Space  
I/O Address (SRAM Address)  
$3F($5F)  
Name  
Function  
SREG  
Status REGister  
$3E ($5E)  
$3D ($5D)  
$3B ($5B)  
$3A ($5A)  
$39 ($59)  
$38 ($58)  
$37 ($57)  
$36 ($56)  
$35 ($55)  
$34 ($54)  
$33 ($53)  
$32 ($52)  
$31 ($51)  
$30 ($50)  
$2F ($4F)  
$2E ($4E)  
$2D ($4D)  
$2C ($4C)  
$2B ($4B)  
$2A ($4A)  
$29 ($49)  
$28 ($48)  
$27 ($47)  
$26 ($46)  
$25 ($45)  
$24 ($44)  
$23 ($43)  
$22 ($42)  
$21 ($41)  
$20 ($40)  
$1F ($3F)  
$1E ($3E)  
$1D ($3D)  
SPH  
Stack Pointer High  
SPL  
Stack Pointer Low  
GIMSK  
GIFR  
General Interrupt MaSK register  
General Interrupt Flag Register  
TIMSK  
TIFR  
Timer/Counter Interrupt MaSK Register  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register  
Store Program Memory Control Register  
Extended MCU general Control Register  
MCU general Control Register  
SPMCR  
EMCUCR  
MCUCR  
MCUSR  
TCCR0  
TCNT0  
OCR0  
MCU general Status Register  
Timer/Counter0 Control Register  
Timer/Counter0 (8-bit)  
Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register  
Special Function IO Register  
SFIOR  
TCCR1A  
TCCR1B  
TCNT1H  
TCNT1L  
OCR1AH  
OCR1AL  
OCR1BH  
OCR1BL  
TCCR2  
ASSR  
Timer/Counter1 Control Register A  
Timer/Counter1 Control Register B  
Timer/Counter1 High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Low Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterA High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterA Low Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterB High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterB Low Byte  
Timer/Counter2 Control Register  
Asynchronous mode StatuS Register  
Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register Low Byte  
Timer/Counter2 (8-bit)  
ICR1H  
ICR1L  
TCNT2  
OCR2  
Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register  
Watchdog Timer Control Register  
UART Baud Register HIgh  
WDTCR  
UBRRHI  
EEARH  
EEARL  
EEDR  
EEPROM Address Register High  
EEPROM Address Register Low  
EEPROM Data Register  
19  
Table 1. ATmega161 I/O Space (Continued)  
I/O Address (SRAM Address)  
$1C ($3C)  
$1B($3B)  
Name  
Function  
EECR  
PORTA  
DDRA  
PINA  
EEPROM Control Register  
Data Register, Port A  
$1A ($3A)  
$19 ($39)  
$18 ($38)  
$17 ($37)  
$16 ($36)  
$15 ($35)  
$14 ($34)  
$13 ($33)  
$12 ($32)  
$11 ($31)  
Data Direction Register, Port A  
Input Pins, Port A  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PINB  
Data Register, Port B  
Data Direction Register, Port B  
Input Pins, Port B  
PORTC  
DDRC  
PINC  
Data Register, Port C  
Data Direction Register, Port C  
Input Pins, Port C  
PORTD  
DDRD  
PIND  
Data Register, Port D  
Data Direction Register, Port D  
Input Pins, Port D  
$10 ($30)  
$0F ($2F)  
$0E ($2E)  
$0D ($2D)  
$0C ($2C)  
$0B ($2B)  
$0A ($2A)  
$09 ($29)  
$08 ($28)  
$07 ($27)  
$06 ($26)  
$05 ($25)  
$03 ($23)  
$02 ($22)  
$01 ($21)  
$00 ($20)  
SPDR  
SPSR  
SPI I/O Data Register  
SPI Status Register  
SPCR  
UDR0  
SPI Control Register  
UART0 I/O Data Register  
UART0 Control and Status Register  
UART0 Control and Status Register  
UART0 Baud Rate Register  
Analog Comparator Control and Status Register  
Data Register, Port E  
UCSR0A  
UCSR0B  
UBRR0  
ACSR  
PORTE  
DDRE  
PINE  
Data Direction Register, Port E  
Input Pins, Port E  
UDR1  
UART1 I/O Data Register  
UART1 Control and Status Register  
UART1 Control and Status Register  
UART1 Baud Rate Register  
UCSR1A  
UCSR1B  
UBRR1  
Note:  
Reserved and unused locations are not shown in the table.  
All ATmega161 I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. The I/O locations are accessed by the IN and OUT  
instructions transferring data between the 32 general purpose working registers and the I/O space. I/O registers within the  
address range $00 - $1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the value of sin-  
gle bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer to the instruction set chapter for more details.  
When using the I/O specific commands IN, OUT the I/O addresses $00 - $3F must be used. When addressing I/O registers  
as SRAM, $20 must be added to this address. All I/O register addresses throughout this document are shown with the  
SRAM address in parentheses.  
For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses  
should never be written.  
ATmega161(L)  
20  
ATmega161(L)  
Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that the CBI and SBI instructions will operate on  
all bits in the I/O register, writing a one back into any flag read as set, thus clearing the flag. The CBI and SBI instructions  
work with registers $00 to $1F only.  
The I/O and peripherals control registers are explained in the following sections.  
Status Register SREG  
The AVR status register SREG at I/O space location $3F ($5F) is defined as:  
Bit  
7
I
6
T
5
H
4
S
3
V
2
N
1
Z
0
C
$3F ($5F)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
SREG  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
Bit 7 - I: Global Interrupt Enable  
The global interrupt enable bit must be set (one) for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual interrupt enable control is  
then performed in separate control registers. If the global interrupt enable bit is cleared (zero), none of the interrupts are  
enabled independent of the individual interrupt enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has  
occurred, and is set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts.  
Bit 6 - T: Bit Copy Storage  
The bit copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T bit as source and destination for the operated bit. A  
bit from a register in the register file can be copied into T by the BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a  
register in the register file by the BLD instruction.  
Bit 5 - H: Half Carry Flag  
The half carry flag H indicates a half carry in some arithmetic operations. See the Instruction Set Description for detailed  
information.  
Bit 4 - S: Sign Bit, S = N  
V
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the negative flag N and the twos complement overflow flag V. See the Instruc-  
tion Set Description for detailed information.  
Bit 3 - V: Twos Complement Overflow Flag  
The twos complement overflow flag V supports twos complement arithmetics. See the Instruction Set Description for  
detailed information.  
Bit 2 - N: Negative Flag  
The negative flag N indicates a negative result after the different arithmetic and logic operations. See the Instruction Set  
Description for detailed information.  
Bit 1 - Z: Zero Flag  
The zero flag Z indicates a zero result after the different arithmetic and logic operations. See the Instruction Set Description  
for detailed information.  
Bit 0 - C: Carry Flag  
The carry flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the Instruction Set Description for detailed  
information.  
Note that the status register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored when returning from  
an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.  
21  
 
Stack Pointer SP  
The ATmega161 Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space locations $3E ($5E) and $3D ($5D).  
As the ATmega161 supports up to 64KB memory, all 16 bits are used.  
Bit  
15  
SP15  
SP7  
7
14  
SP14  
SP6  
6
13  
SP13  
SP5  
5
12  
SP12  
SP4  
4
11  
SP11  
SP3  
3
10  
SP10  
SP2  
2
9
SP9  
SP1  
1
8
SP8  
SP0  
0
$3E ($5E)  
$3D ($5D)  
SPH  
SPL  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt Stacks are located. This Stack  
space in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are  
enabled. The stack pointer must be set to point above $60. The Stack Pointer is decremented by one when data is pushed  
onto the Stack with the PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by two when an address is pushed onto the Stack with  
subroutine calls and interrupts. The Stack Pointer is incremented by one when data is popped from the Stack with the POP  
instruction, and it is incremented by two when an address is popped from the Stack with return from subroutine RET or  
return from interrupt RETI.  
Reset and Interrupt Handling  
The ATmega161 provides 20 different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate reset vector, each have a sep-  
arate program vector in the program memory space. All interrupts are assigned individual enable bits which must be set  
(one) together with the I-bit in the status register in order to enable the interrupt.  
The lowest addresses in the program memory space are automatically defined as the Reset and Interrupt vectors. The  
complete list of vectors is shown in Table 2. The list also determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower  
the address the higher is the priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 the External Interrupt  
Request 0 etc.  
Table 2. Reset and Interrupt Vectors  
Vector No.  
Program Address Source  
Interrupt Definition  
1
2
$000  
$002  
$004  
$006  
$008  
$00a  
$00c  
$00e  
$010  
$012  
$014  
$016  
$018  
$01a  
$01c  
RESET  
External Pin, Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset and Watchdog Reset  
External Interrupt Request 0  
External Interrupt Request 1  
External Interrupt Request 2  
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match  
Timer/Counter2 Overflow  
INT0  
3
INT1  
4
INT2  
5
TIMER2 COMP  
TIMER2 OVF  
TIMER1 CAPT  
TIMER1 COMPA  
TIMER1 COMPB  
TIMER1 OVF  
TIMER0 COMP  
TIMER0 OVF  
SPI, STC  
6
7
Timer/Counter1 Capture Event  
Timer/Counter1 Compare Match A  
Timer/Counter1 Compare Match B  
Timer/Counter1 Overflow  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match  
Timer/Counter0 Overflow  
Serial Transfer Complete  
UART0, RX  
UART1, RX  
UART0, Rx Complete  
UART1, Rx Complete  
ATmega161(L)  
22  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 2. Reset and Interrupt Vectors (Continued)  
Vector No.  
Program Address Source  
Interrupt Definition  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
$01e  
$020  
$022  
$024  
$026  
$028  
UART0, UDRE  
UART0 Data Register Empty  
UART1 Data Register Empty  
UART0, Tx Complete  
UART1, Tx Complete  
EEPROM Ready  
UART1, UDRE  
UART0, TX  
UART1, TX  
EE_RDY  
ANA_COMP  
Analog Comparator  
The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses are:  
Address  
$000  
$002  
$004  
$006  
$008  
$00a  
$00c  
$00e  
$010  
$012  
$014  
$016  
$018  
$01a  
$01c  
$01e  
$020  
$022  
$024  
$026  
$028  
;
Labels  
Code  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
Comments  
RESET  
; Reset Handler  
; IRQ0 Handler  
; IRQ1 Handler  
; IRQ2 Handler  
EXT_INT0  
EXT_INT1  
EXT_INT2  
TIM2_COMP ; Timer2 Compare Handler  
TIM2_OVF ; Timer2 Overflow Handler  
TIM1_CAPT ; Timer1 Capture Handler  
TIM1_COMPA ; Timer1 CompareA Handler  
TIM1_COMPB ; Timer1 CompareB Handler  
TIM1_OVF  
; Timer1 Overflow Handler  
TIM0_COMP ; Timer0 Compare Handler  
TIM0_OVF  
SPI_STC;  
; Timer0 Overflow Handler  
; SPI Transfer Complete Handler  
UART_RXC0 ; UART0 RX Complete Handler  
UART_RXC1 ; UART1 RX Complete Handler  
UART_DRE0 ; UDR0 Empty Handler  
UART_DRE1 ; UDR1 Empty Handler  
UART_TXC0 ; UART0 TX Complete Handler  
UART_TXC1 ; UART1 TX Complete Handler  
EE_RDY  
; EEPROM Ready Handler  
ANA_COMP  
; Analog Comparator Handler  
$02a  
$02b  
$02c  
$02d  
$02e  
MAIN:  
ldi r16,high(RAMEND); Main program start  
out SPH,r16  
ldi r16,low(RAMEND)  
out SPL,r16  
<instr> xxx  
23  
Reset Sources  
The ATmega161 has four sources of reset:  
Power-on Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the power-on reset threshold (VPOT).  
External Reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for more than 500 ns.  
Watchdog Reset. The MCU is reset when the Watchdog timer period expires and the Watchdog is enabled.  
Brown-out Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage VCC falls below a certain voltage.  
During reset, all I/O registers are then set to their initial values, and the program starts execution from address $000. The  
instruction placed in address $000 must be an JMP relative jump instruction to the reset handling routine. If the program  
never enables an interrupt source, the interrupt vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these  
locations. The circuit diagram in Figure 24 shows the reset logic. Table 3 and Table 4 defines the timing and electrical  
parameters of the reset circuitry  
Figure 24. Reset Logic  
DATA BUS  
MCU Status  
Register (MCUSR)  
Brown-Out  
BODEN  
Reset Circuit  
BODLEVEL  
CKSEL[2:0]  
Full  
Delay Counters  
CK  
ATmega161(L)  
24  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 3. Reset Characteristics (VCC = 5.0V)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Condition  
BOD disabled  
BOD enabled  
BOD disabled  
BOD enabled  
Min  
1.0  
1.7  
0.4  
1.7  
-
Typ  
1.4  
2.2  
0.6  
2.2  
-
Max  
1.8  
Units  
V
V
V
V
V
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (rising)  
2.7  
VPOT  
0.8  
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (falling)  
RESET Pin Threshold Voltage  
2.7  
VRST  
VBOT  
0.85 VCC  
2.8  
(BODLEVEL = 1)  
(BODLEVEL = 0)  
2.6  
3.8  
2.7  
4.0  
Brown-out Reset Threshold Voltage  
V
4.2  
Note:  
The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOT (falling).  
Table 4. Reset Delay Selections  
CKSEL  
[2:0]  
Start-up Time, VCC = 2.7V,  
BODLEVEL Unprogrammed  
Start-up Time, VCC = 4.0V,  
BODLEVEL Programmed  
Recommended Usage(1)  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
4.2 ms + 6 CK  
30 µs + 6 CK  
5.8 ms + 6 CK  
10 µs + 6 CK  
External Clock, fast rising power  
External Clock, BOD enabled(2)(3)  
67 ms + 16K CK  
4.2 ms + 16K CK  
30 µs + 16K CK  
67 ms + 1K CK  
4.2 ms + 1K CK  
30 µs + 1K CK  
92 ms + 16K CK  
5.8 ms + 16K CK  
10 µs + 16K CK  
92 ms + 1K CK  
5.8 ms + 1K CK  
10 µs + 1K CK  
Crystal Oscillator, slowly rising power  
Crystal Oscillator, fast rising power  
Crystal Oscillator, BOD enabled(2)(3)  
Ceramic Resonator/External clock, Slowly rising power  
Ceramic Resonator, fast rising power  
Ceramic Resonator, BOD enabled(2)(3)  
Notes: 1. The CKSEL fuses control only the start-up time. The oscillator is the same for all selections. On power-up, the real-time part  
of the start-up time is increased with typ. 0.6ms.  
2. Or external power-on reset.  
3. When BOD is enabled, there will be a real-time part = 50 µs (typ.)  
Table 4 shows the start-up times from reset. From sleep, only the clock counting part of the start-up time is used. The  
watchdog oscillator is used for timing the real-time part of the start-up time. The number WDT oscillator cycles used for  
each time-out is shown in Table 5.  
Table 5. Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles  
BODLEVEL  
Time-out  
Number of cycles  
Unprogrammed  
Unprogrammed  
Programmed  
Programmed  
4.2 ms (at Vcc=2.7V)  
67 ms (at Vcc=2.7V)  
5.8 ms (at Vcc=4.0V)  
92 ms (at Vcc=4.0V)  
1K  
16K  
4K  
64K  
Note:  
The bod-level fuse can be used to select start-up times even if the Brown-out detection is disabled (by leaving the BODEN fuse  
unprogrammed).  
The frequency of the watchdog oscillator is voltage dependent as shown in the Electrical Characteristics section. The  
device is shipped with CKSEL = 010.  
25  
 
 
 
 
 
Power-on Reset  
A Power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by an on-chip detection circuit. The detection level is nominally 1.4V (rising  
VCC). The POR is activated whenever VCC is below the detection level. The POR circuit can be used to trigger the start-up  
reset, as well as detect a failure in supply voltage.  
A Power-on Reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is reset from power-on. Reaching the power-on reset threshold  
voltage invokes a delay counter, which determines the delay, for which the device is kept in RESET after VCC rise. The  
time-out period of the delay counter can be defined by the user through the CKSEL fuses. The eight different selections for  
the delay period are presented in Table 4. The RESET signal is activated again, without any delay, when the VCC  
decreases below detection level.  
Figure 25. MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to VCC.  
VPOT  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
Figure 26. MCU Start-up, RESET Controlled Externally  
VPOT  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
External Reset  
An external reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin. Reset pulses longer than 500 ns will generate a reset,  
even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset. When the applied signal reaches the  
Reset Threshold Voltage VRST on its positive edge, the delay timer starts the MCU after the Time-out period tTOUT has  
expired.  
ATmega161(L)  
26  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 27. External Reset During Operation  
Brown-out Detection  
ATmega161 has an on-chip brown-out detection (BOD) circuit for monitoring the VCC level during the operation. The BOD  
circuit can be enabled/disabled by the fuse BODEN. When BODEN is enabled (BODEN programmed), and VCC decreases  
to a value below the trigger level, the brown-out reset is immediately activated. When VCC increases above the trigger level,  
the brown-out reset is deactivated after a delay. The delay is defined by the user in the same way as the delay of POR sig-  
nal, in Table 4. The trigger level for the BOD can be selected by the fuse BODLEVEL to be 2.7V (BODLEVEL  
unprogrammed), or 4.0V ((BODLEVEL programmed). The trigger level has a hysteresis of 50 mV to ensure spike free  
brown-out detection.  
The BOD circuit will only detect a drop in VCC if the voltage stays below the trigger level for longer than 9 µs for trigger level  
4.0V, 21 µs for trigger level 2.7V (typical values).  
Figure 28. Brown-out Reset During Operation  
VBOT+  
VCC  
VBOT-  
RESET  
t
TOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
Watchdog Reset  
When the Watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of 1 XTAL cycle duration. On the falling edge of this  
pulse, the delay timer starts counting the Time-out period tTOUT. Refer to Page page 52 for details on operation of the  
Watchdog.  
27  
 
 
Figure 29. Watchdog Reset During Operation  
MCU Status Register MCUSR  
The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU reset.  
Bit  
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
2
1
EXTRF  
0
$34 ($54)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
WDRF  
R/W  
BORF  
R/W  
PORF  
R/W  
MCUSR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W  
See bit description  
Bits 7..4 - Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
Bit 3 - WDRF: Watchdog Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a watchdog reset occurs. The bit is cleared by a power-on reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
Bit 2 - BORF: Brown-out Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a brown-out reset occurs. The bit is cleared by a power-on reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
Bit 1 - EXTRF: External Reset Flag  
This bit is set if an external reset occurs. The bit is cleared by a power-on reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
Bit 0 - PORF: Power-on Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a power-on reset occurs. The bit is cleared only by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
To make use of the reset flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read and then clear the MCUSR as early as  
possible in the program. If the register is cleared before another reset occurs, the source of the reset can be found by  
examining the reset flags.  
Interrupt Handling  
The ATmega161 has two 8-bit Interrupt Mask control registers; GIMSK General Interrupt Mask register and TIMSK –  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask register.  
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared (zero) and all interrupts are disabled. The user soft-  
ware can set (one) the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. The I-bit is set (one) when a Return from Interrupt instruction –  
RETI is executed.  
When the Program Counter is vectored to the actual interrupt vector in order to execute the interrupt handling routine, hard-  
ware clears the corresponding flag that generated the interrupt. Some of the interrupt flags can also be cleared by writing a  
logic one to the flag bit position(s) to be cleared.  
If an interrupt condition occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is cleared (zero), the interrupt flag will be set  
and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is cleared by software.  
ATmega161(L)  
28  
 
ATmega161(L)  
If one or more interrupt conditions occur when the global interrupt enable bit is cleared (zero), the corresponding interrupt  
flag(s) will be set and remembered until the global interrupt enable bit is set (one), and will be executed by order of priority.  
Note that external level interrupt does not have a flag, and will only be remembered for as long as the interrupt condition is  
present.  
Note that the status register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored when returning from  
an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.  
Interrupt Response Time  
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is 4 clock cycles minimum. After 4 clock cycles the  
program vector address for the actual interrupt handling routine is executed. During this 4 clock cycle period, the Program  
Counter (13 bits) is pushed onto the Stack. The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and this jump takes  
3 clock cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction is completed before the  
interrupt is served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt execution response time is  
increased by 4 clock cycles.  
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes 4 clock cycles. During these 4 clock cycles, the Program Counter (2 bytes)  
is popped back from the Stack, the Stack Pointer is incremented by 2, and the I flag in SREG is set. When AVR exits from  
an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one more instruction before any pending interrupt is  
served.  
General Interrupt Mask Register GIMSK  
Bit  
7
6
5
INT2  
R
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
0
-
$3B ($5B)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
INT1  
R/W  
0
INT0  
R/W  
0
GIMSK  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
Bit 7 - INT1: External Interrupt Request 1 Enable  
When the INT1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the external pin interrupt is enabled.  
The Interrupt Sense Control1 bits 1/0 (ISC11 and ISC10) in the MCU general Control Register (MCUCR) define whether  
the external interrupt is activated on rising and/or falling edge of the INT1 pin or level sensed. Activity on the pin will cause  
an interrupt request even if INT1 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of External Interrupt Request 1 is  
executed from program memory address $004. See also External Interrupts.  
Bit 6 - INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable  
When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the external pin interrupt is enabled.  
The Interrupt Sense Control0 bits 1/0 (ISC01 and ISC00) in the MCU general Control Register (MCUCR) defines whether  
the external interrupt is activated on rising and/or falling edge of the INT0 pin or level sensed. Activity on the pin will cause  
an interrupt request even if INT0 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of External Interrupt Request 0 is  
executed from program memory address $002. See also External Interrupts.”  
Bit 5- INT2: External Interrupt Request 2 Enable  
When the INT2 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the external pin interrupt is activated.  
The Interrupt Sense Control2 bit (ISC02 in the Extended MCU Control Register (EMCUCR) defines whether the external  
interrupt is activated on rising or falling edge of the INT2 pin. Activity on the pin will cause an interrupt request even if INT2  
is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of External Interrupt Request 2 is executed from program memory  
address $006. See also External Interrupts.”  
Bits 4..0 - Res: Reserved bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
29  
 
General Interrupt Flag Register GIFR  
Bit  
7
INTF1  
R/W  
0
6
INTF0  
R/W  
0
5
INTF2  
R/W  
0
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
0
-
$3A ($5A)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
GIFR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
Bit 7 - INTF1: External Interrupt Flag1  
When an event on the INT1 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF1 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the INT1 bit  
in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the interrupt vector at address $004. The flag is cleared when the interrupt  
routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.  
Bit 6 - INTF0: External Interrupt Flag0  
When an event on the INT0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the INT0 bit  
in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the interrupt vector at address $002. The flag is cleared when the interrupt  
routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.  
Bit 5 - INTF2: External Interrupt Flag2  
When an event on the INT2 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF2 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the INT2 bit  
in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the interrupt vector at address $006. The flag is cleared when the interrupt  
routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.  
Bits 4..0 - Res: Reserved bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
Timer/counter Interrupt Mask Register TIMSK  
Bit  
7
TOIE1  
R/W  
0
6
OCIE1A  
R/W  
0
5
OCIE1B  
R/W  
0
4
TOIE2  
R/W  
0
3
TICIE1  
R/W  
0
2
OCIE2  
R/W  
0
1
TOIE0  
R/W  
0
0
OCIE0  
R/W  
0
$39 ($59)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
TIMSK  
Bit 7 - TOIE1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt is  
enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $012) is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter1 occurs, i.e., when the  
TOV1 bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR.  
Bit 6 - OCE1A:Timer/Counter1 Output CompareA Match Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE1A bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 CompareA Match  
interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $00e) is executed if a CompareA match in Timer/Counter1  
occurs, i.e., when the OCF1A bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR.  
Bit 5 - OCIE1B:Timer/Counter1 Output CompareB Match Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE1B bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 CompareB Match  
interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $010) is executed if a CompareB match in Timer/Counter1  
occurs, i.e., when the OCF1B bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR.  
Bit 4 - TOIE2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE2 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is  
enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $00a) is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the  
TOV2 bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR.  
Bit 3 - TICIE1: Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Interrupt Enable  
When the TICIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Event  
Interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $00C) is executed if a capture-triggering event occurs on pin 31,  
ICP, i.e., when the ICF1 bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR.  
Bit 2 - OCIE2:Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE2 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare Match inter-  
rupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $008) is executed if a Compare2 match in Timer/Counter2 occurs,  
i.e., when the OCF2 bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR.  
ATmega161(L)  
30  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Bit 1 - TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is  
enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $016) is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the  
TOV0 bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR.  
Bit 0 - OCIE0: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter0 Compare Match inter-  
rupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $014) is executed if a Compare0 match in Timer/Counter0 occurs,  
i.e., when the OCF0 bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR.  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR  
Bit  
7
TOV1  
R/W  
0
6
OCF1A  
R/W  
0
5
OCIFB  
R/W  
0
4
TOV2  
R/W  
0
3
ICF1  
R/W  
0
2
OCF2  
R/W  
0
1
TOV0  
R/W  
0
0
OCF0  
R/W  
0
$38 ($58)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
TIFR  
Bit 7 - TOV1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Flag  
The TOV1 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter1. TOV1 is cleared by hardware when executing the  
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV1 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in  
SREG, and TOIE1 (Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV1 are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Overflow  
Interrupt is executed. In PWM mode, this bit is set when Timer/Counter1 changes counting direction at $0000.  
Bit 6 - OCF1A: Output Compare Flag 1A  
The OCF1A bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter1 and the data in OCR1A Output  
Compare Register 1A. OCF1A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alterna-  
tively, OCF1A is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, and OCIE1A (Timer/Counter1 Compare  
match InterruptA Enable), and the OCF1A are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Compare A match Interrupt is executed.  
Bit 5 - OCF1B: Output Compare Flag 1B  
The OCF1B bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter1 and the data in OCR1B Output  
Compare Register 1B. OCF1B is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alterna-  
tively, OCF1B is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, and OCIE1B (Timer/Counter1 Compare  
match InterruptB Enable), and the OCF1B are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Compare B match Interrupt is executed.  
Bit 4 - TOV2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Flag  
The bit TOV2 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter2. TOV2 is cleared by hardware when executing the  
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV2 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG  
I-bit, and TOIE2 (Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV2 are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Overflow inter-  
rupt is executed.  
Bit 3 - ICF1: - Input Capture Flag 1  
The ICF1 bit is set (one) to flag an input capture event, indicating that the Timer/Counter1 value has been transferred to the  
input capture register ICR1. ICF1 is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector.  
Alternatively, ICF1 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, and TICIE1 (Timer/Counter1 Input  
Capture Interrupt Enable), and ICF1 are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Capture Interrupt is executed.  
Bit 2 - OCF2: Output Compare Flag 2  
The OCF2 bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the data in OCR2 Output Com-  
pare Register 2. OCF2 is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively,  
OCF2 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, and OCIE2 (Timer/Counter2 Compare match  
InterruptA Enable), and the OCF2 are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed.  
Bit 1 - TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag  
The bit TOV0 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hardware when executing the  
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG  
I-bit, and TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV0 are set (one), the Timer/Counter0 Overflow  
interrupt is executed.  
31  
 
Bit 2 - OCF0: Output Compare Flag 0  
The OCF0 bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and the data in OCR0 Output Com-  
pare Register 0. OCF0 is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively,  
OCF0 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, and OCIE0 (Timer/Counter0 Compare match  
InterruptA Enable), and the OCF0 are set (one), the Timer/Counter0 Compare match Interrupt is executed.  
External Interrupts  
The external interrupts are triggered by the INT0, INT1 and INT2 pins. Observe that, if enabled, the interrupts will trigger  
even if the INT0/INT1/INT2 pins are configured as outputs. This feature provides a way of generating a software interrupt.  
The external interrupts can be triggered by a falling or rising edge or a low level (INT2 is only an edge triggered interrupt).  
This is set up as indicated in the specification for the MCU Control Register MCUCR (INT0/INT1) and EMCUCR (INT2).  
When the external interrupt is enabled and is configured as level triggered (only INT0/INT1), the interrupt will trigger as long  
as the pin is held low.  
MCU Control Register MCUCR  
The MCU Control Register contains control bits for general MCU functions.  
Bit  
7
6
SRW10  
R/W  
0
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
ISC11  
R/W  
0
2
ISC10  
R/W  
0
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
$35 ($55)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
SRE  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
Bit 7 - SRE: External SRAM Enable  
When the SRE bit is set (one), the external data memory interface is enabled, and the pin functions AD0-7 (Port A), A8-15  
(Port C), ALE (Port E), WR and RD (Port D) are activated as the alternate pin functions. The SRE bit overrides any pin  
direction settings in the respective data direction registers. See Figure 51 Figure 54 for a description of the external mem-  
ory pin functions. When the SRE bit is cleared (zero), the external data memory interface is disabled, and the normal pin  
and data direction settings are used.  
Bit 6 - SRW10: External SRAM Wait State  
The SRW10 bit is used to set up extra wait states in the external memory interface. See Interface to external memoryon  
page 72 for a detailed description.  
Bit 5 - SE: Sleep Enable  
The SE bit must be set (one) to make the MCU enter the sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed. To avoid the  
MCU entering the sleep mode unless it is the programmers purpose, it is recommended to set the Sleep Enable SE bit just  
before the execution of the SLEEP instruction.  
Bit 4 - SM1: Sleep Mode Select bit 1  
The SM1 bit together with the SM0 control bit in EMCUCR selects between the three available sleep modes as shown in  
the following table.  
Table 6. Sleep Mode Select  
SM1  
SM0  
Sleep Mode  
Idle Mode  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Reserved  
Power-down  
Power Save  
Bits 3, 2 - ISC11, ISC10: Interrupt Sense Control 1 bit 1 and bit 0  
The External Interrupt 1 is activated by the external pin INT1 if the SREG I-flag and the corresponding interrupt mask in the  
GIMSK are set. The level and edges on the external INT1 pin that activate the interrupt are defined in Table 7. The value on  
the INT1 pin is sampled before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer than one  
clock period will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If low level interrupt is  
selected, the low level must be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an interrupt.  
ATmega161(L)  
32  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 7. Interrupt 1 Sense Control  
ISC11  
ISC10  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The low level of INT1 generates an interrupt request.  
Any logical change on INT1 generates an interrupt request  
The falling edge of INT1 generates an interrupt request.  
The rising edge of INT1 generates an interrupt request.  
Note:  
When changing the ISC11/ISC10 bits, INT1 must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the GIMSK Register. Other-  
wise an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed.  
Bit 1, 0 - ISC01, ISC00: Interrupt Sense Control 0 bit 1 and bit 0  
The External Interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-flag and the corresponding interrupt mask is set.  
The level and edges on the external INT0 pin that activate the interrupt are defined in Table 8. The value on the INT0 pin is  
sampled before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer than one clock period will  
generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If low level interrupt is selected, the low  
level must be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an interrupt.  
Table 8. Interrupt 0 Sense Control  
ISC01  
ISC00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
Any logical change on INT0 generates an interrupt request  
The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The rising edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
Note:  
When changing the ISC01/ISC00 bits, INT0 must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the GIMSK Register. Other-  
wise an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed.  
Extended MCU Control Register EMCUCR  
The Extended MCU Control Register contains control bits for external interrupt 2, sleep mode bit and control bits for the  
external memory interface.  
Bit  
7
6
SRL2  
R/W  
0
5
SRL1  
R/W  
0
4
SRL0  
R/W  
0
3
SRW01  
R/W  
0
2
SRW00  
R/W  
0
1
SRW11  
R/W  
0
0
ISC2  
R/W  
0
$36 ($56)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
SM0  
R/W  
0
EMCUCR  
Bit 7 - SM0: Sleep mode bit 0  
When this bit is set (one) and sleep mode bit 1 (SM1) in MCUCR is set, Power Save Mode is selected as sleep mode.  
Refer to page 34 for a detailed description of the sleep modes.  
Bit 6..4 - SRL2, SRL1, SRL0: External SRAM limit  
It is possible to configure different wait-states for different external memory addresses in ATmega161. The SRL2 SRL0  
bits are used to define at which address the different wait-states will be configured. See Interface to external memoryon  
page 72 for a detailed description.  
Bit 3..1 - SRW01, SRW00, SRW11: External SRAM wait-state select bits.  
The SRW01, SRW00 and SRW11 bits are used to set up extra wait states in the external memory interface. See Interface  
to external memoryon page 72 for a detailed description.  
Bit 0 - ISC2: Interrupt Sense Control 2  
The external interrupt 2 is activated by the external pin INT2 if the SREG I-flag and the corresponding interrupt mask in the  
GIMSK are set. If ISC2 is cleared (zero) a falling edge on INT2 activates the interrupt. If ISC2 is set (one) a rising edge on  
INT2 activates the interrupt. Edges on INT2 are registered asynchronously. Pulses on INT2 wider than 50 ns will generate  
an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt.  
33  
 
 
Sleep Modes  
To enter any of the three sleep modes, the SE bit in MCUCR must be set (one) and a SLEEP instruction must be executed.  
The SM1 bit in the MCUCR register and SM0 bit in the EMCUCR register select which sleep mode (Idle, Power-down, or  
Power Save) will be activated by the SLEEP instruction, see Table 6. If an enabled interrupt occurs while the MCU is in a  
sleep mode, the MCU awakes. The CPU is then halted for 4 cycles, it executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execu-  
tion from the instruction following SLEEP. The contents of the register file, SRAM, and I/O memory are unaltered. If a reset  
occurs during sleep mode, the MCU wakes up and executes from the Reset vector  
Idle Mode  
When the SM1/SM0 bits are set to 00, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter the Idle Mode, stopping the CPU but  
allowing SPI, UARTs, Analog Comparator, Timer/Counters, Watchdog and the interrupt system to continue operating. This  
enables the MCU to wake-up from external triggered interrupts as well as internal ones like the Timer Overflow and UART  
Receive Complete interrupts. If wake-up from the Analog Comparator interrupt is not required, the Analog Comparator can  
be powered down by setting the ACD-bit in the Analog Comparator Control and Status register ACSR. This will reduce  
power consumption in Idle Mode.  
Power-down Mode  
When the SM1/SM0 bits are set to 10, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter the Power-down Mode. In this mode,  
the external oscillator is stopped, while the external interrupts and the Watchdog (if enabled) continue operating. Only an  
external reset, a watchdog reset (if enabled), an external level interrupt on INT0 or INT1, or an external edge interrupt on  
INT2 can wake-up the MCU.  
If INT2 is used for wake-up from power-down mode, the edge is remembered until the MCU wakes up.  
If a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from power-down mode, the changed level must be held for some time to  
wake-up the MCU. This makes the MCU less sensitive to noise. The changed level is sampled twice by the watchdog oscil-  
lator clock, and if the input has the required level during this time, the MCU will wake-up. The period of the watchdog  
oscillator is 1 µs (nominal) at 5.0V and 25C. The frequency of the watchdog oscillator is voltage dependent as shown in the  
Electrical Characteristics section.  
When waking up from Power-down Mode, there is a delay from the wake-up condition occurs until the wake-up becomes  
effective. This allows the clock to restart and become stable after having been stopped. The wake-up period is defined by  
the same CKSEL fuses that define the reset time-out period. The wake-up period is equal to the clock counting part of the  
reset period, as shown in Table 4. If the wake-up condition disappears before the MCU wakes up and starts to execute,  
e.g. a low level on INT0 is not held long enough, the interrupt causing the wake-up will not be executed.  
Power Save Mode  
When the SM1/SM0 bits are 11, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter the Power Save Mode. This mode is identical  
to Power-down, with one exception:  
If Timer/Counter2 is clocked asynchronously, i.e. the AS2 bit in ASSR is set, Timer/Counter2 will run during sleep. In addi-  
tion to the Power-down wake-up sources, the device can also wake-up from either Timer Overflow or Output Compare  
event from Timer/Counter2 if the corresponding Timer/Counter2 interrupt enable bits are set in TIMSK and the global inter-  
rupt enable bit in SREG is set.  
Timer/Counters  
The ATmega161 provides three general purpose Timer/Counters two 8-bit T/Cs and one 16-bit T/C. Timer/Counter2 can  
optionally be asynchronously clocked from an external oscillator. This oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768 kHz  
watch crystal, enabling use of Timer/Counter2 as a Real Time Clock (RTC). Timer/Counters 0 and 1 have individual pres-  
caling selection from the same 10-bit prescaling timer. Timer/Counter2 has its own prescaler. Both these prescalers can be  
reset by setting the corresponding control bits in the Special Functions IO Register (SFIOR). Refer to page 36 for a detailed  
description. These Timer/Counters can either be used as a timer with an internal clock time-base or as a counter with an  
external pin connection which triggers the counting.  
ATmega161(L)  
34  
ATmega161(L)  
Timer/Counter Prescalers  
Figure 30. Prescaler for Timer/Counter0 and 1  
Clear  
PSR10  
TCK1  
TCK0  
For Timer/Counters 0 and 1, the four prescaled selections are: CK/8, CK/64, CK/256 and CK/1024, where CK is the oscilla-  
tor clock. For the two Timer/Counters 0 and 1, CK, external source, and stop, can also be selected as clock sources.  
Setting the PSR10 bit in SFIOR resets the prescaler. This allows the user to operate with a predictable prescaler. Note that  
Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter 0 share the same prescaler and a prescaler reset will affect both Timer/Counters.  
35  
Figure 31. Timer/Counter2 Prescaler  
CK  
PCK2  
10-BIT T/C PRESCALER  
Clear  
TOSC1  
AS2  
PSR2  
0
CS20  
CS21  
CS22  
TIMER/COUNTER2 CLOCK SOURCE  
TCK2  
The clock source for Timer/Counter2 prescaler is named PCK2. PCK2 is by default connected to the main system clock  
CK. By setting the AS2 bit in ASSR, Timer/Counter2 is asynchronously clocked from the PD4(TOSC1) pin. This enables  
use of Timer/Counter2 as a Real Time Clock (RTC). When AS2 is set, pins PD4(TOSC1) and PD5(TOSC2) are discon-  
nected from Port D. A crystal can then be connected between the PD4(TOSC1) and PD5(TOSC2) pins to serve as an  
independent clock source for Timer/Counter2. The oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768 kHz crystal. Alternatively, an  
external clock signal can be applied to PD4(TOSC1). The frequency of this clock must be lower than one fourth of the CPU  
clock and not higher than 256 kHz. Setting the PSR2 bit in SFIOR resets the prescaler. This allows the user to operate with  
a predictable prescaler.  
Special Function IO Register SFIOR  
Bit  
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
PSR2  
R/W  
0
0
$30 ($50)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
PSR10 SFIOR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W  
0
Bit 7..2 - Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
Bit 1 - PSR2: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2  
When this bit is set (one) the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. The bit will be cleared by hardware after the operation  
is performed. Writing a zero to this bit will have no effect. This bit will always be read as zero if Timer/Counter2 is clocked  
by the internal CPU clock. If this bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating in asynchronous mode however, the bit will  
remain as one until the prescaler has been reset. See Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2on page 43 for a  
detailed description of asynchronous operation.  
Bit 0 - PSR10: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0  
When this bit is set (one) the Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be reset. The bit will be cleared by hard-  
ware after the operation is performed. Writing a zero to this bit will have no effect. Note that Timer/Counter1 and  
Timer/Counter0 share the same prescaler and a reset of this prescaler will affect both timers. This bit will always be read as  
zero.  
ATmega161(L)  
36  
 
ATmega161(L)  
8-bit Timers/Counters T/C0 and T/C2  
Figure 32 shows the block diagram for Timer/Counter0. Figure 33 shows the block diagram for Timer/Counter2.  
Figure 32. Timer/Counter0 Block Diagram  
T/C0 OVER- T/C0 COMPARE  
FLOW IRQ  
MATCH IRQ  
TIMER INT. MASK  
REGISTER (TIMSK)  
TIMER INT. FLAG  
REGISTER (TIFR)  
T/C0 CONTROL  
REGISTER (TCCR0)  
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS  
IO REGISTER (SFIOR)  
7
7
7
0
0
0
T/C CLEAR  
TIMER/COUNTER0  
(TCNT0)  
T/C CLK SOURCE  
UP/DOWN  
CK  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
T0  
8-BIT COMPARATOR  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
REGISTER0 (OCR0)  
Figure 33. Timer/Counter2 Block Diagram  
T/C2 OVER- T/C2 COMPARE  
FLOW IRQ  
MATCH IRQ  
8-BIT DATA BUS  
8-BIT ASYNCH T/C2 DATA BUS  
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS  
IO REGISTER (SFIOR)  
T/C2 CONTROL  
REGISTER (TCCR2)  
TIMER INT. MASK  
REGISTER (TIMSK)  
TIMER INT. FLAG  
REGISTER (TIFR)  
7
7
7
0
0
0
T/C CLEAR  
TIMER/COUNTER2  
(TCNT2)  
T/C CLK SOURCE  
UP/DOWN  
CK  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
TOSC1  
8-BIT COMPARATOR  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
REGISTER2 (OCR2)  
ASYNCH. STATUS  
REGISTER (ASSR)  
CK  
TCK2  
SYNCH UNIT  
37  
 
 
 
The 8-bit Timer/Counter0 can select clock source from CK, prescaled CK, or an external pin.  
The 8-bit Timer/Counter2 can select clock source from CK, prescaled CK or external TOSC1.  
Both Timers/Counters can be stopped as described in section Timer/Counter0 Control Register TCCR0on page 38 and  
Timer/Counter2 Control Register TCCR2on page 38  
The various status flags (overflow and compare match) are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR. Con-  
trol signals are found in the Timer/Counter Control Register TCCR0 and TCCR2. The interrupt enable/disable settings  
are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register TIMSK.  
When Timer/Counter0 is externally clocked, the external signal is synchronized with the oscillator frequency of the CPU. To  
assure proper sampling of the external clock, the minimum time between two external clock transitions must be at least one  
internal CPU clock period. The external clock signal is sampled on the rising edge of the internal CPU clock.  
The 8-bit Timer/Counters feature both a high resolution and a high accuracy usage with the lower prescaling opportunities.  
Similarly, the high prescaling opportunities make the Timer/Counter0 useful for lower speed functions or exact timing func-  
tions with infrequent actions.  
Timer/Counter0 and 2 can also be used as 8-bit Pulse Width Modulators. In this mode, the Timer/Counter and the output  
compare register serve as a glitch-free, stand-alone PWM with centered pulses. Refer to page 41 for a detailed description  
on this function.  
Timer/Counter0 Control Register TCCR0  
Bit  
7
FOC0  
R/W  
0
6
PWM0  
R/W  
0
5
COM01  
R/W  
0
4
COM00  
R/W  
0
3
CTC0  
R/W  
0
2
CS02  
R/W  
0
1
CS01  
R/W  
0
0
CS00  
R/W  
0
$33 ($53)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
TCCR0  
Timer/Counter2 Control Register TCCR2  
Bit  
7
FOC2  
R/W  
0
6
PWM2  
R/W  
0
5
COM21  
R/W  
0
4
COM20  
R/W  
0
3
CTC2  
R/W  
0
2
CS22  
R/W  
0
1
CS21  
R/W  
0
0
CS20  
R/W  
0
$27 ($47)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
TCCR2  
Bit 7 - FOC0/FOC2: Force Output Compare  
Writing a logical one to this bit, forces a change in the compare match output pin PB0 (Timer/Counter0) and PB1  
(Timer/Counter2) according to the values already set in COMn1 and COMn0. If the COMn1 and COMn0 bits are written in  
the same cycle as FOC0/FOC2, the new settings will not take effect until next compare match or Forced Output Compare  
match occurs. The Force Output Compare bit can be used to change the output pin without waiting for a compare match in  
the timer. The automatic action programmed in COMn1 and COMn0 happens as if a Compare Match had occurred, but no  
interrupt is generated and the Timer/Counters will not be cleared even if CTC0/CTC2 is set. The FOC0/FOC2 bits will  
always be read as zero. The setting of the FOC0/FOC2 bits has no effect in PWM mode.  
Bit 6 - PWM0/PWM2: Pulse Width Modulator Enable  
When set (one) this bit enables PWM mode for Timer/Counter0 or Timer/Counter2. This mode is described on page 41.  
Bits 5,4 - COM01, COM00/COM21, COM20: Compare Output Mode, bits 1 and 0  
The COMn1 and COMn0 control bits determine any output pin action following a compare match in Timer/Counter0 or  
Timer/Counter2. Output pin actions affect pins PB0(OC0) or PB1(OC2). This is an alternative function to an I/O port, and  
the corresponding direction control bit must be set (one) to control an output pin. The control configuration is shown in  
Table 9.  
ATmega161(L)  
38  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 9. Compare Mode Select  
COMn1  
COMn0  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Timer/Counter disconnected from output pin OCn  
Toggle the OCn output line.  
Clear the OCn output line (to zero).  
Set the OCn output line (to one).  
Notes: 1. In PWM mode, these bits have a different function. Refer to Table 12 for a detailed description.  
2. n = 0 or 2  
Bit 3 - CTC0/CTC2: Clear Timer/Counter on Compare Match  
When the CTC0 or CTC2 control bit is set (one), Timer/Counter0 or Timer/Counter2 is reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle  
after a compare match. If the control bit is cleared, Timer/Counter continues counting and is unaffected by a compare  
match. When a prescaling of 1 is used, and the compare register is set to C, the timer will count as follows if CTC0/CTC2 is  
set:  
... | C-1 | C | 0 | 1 | ...  
When the prescaler is set to divide by 8, the timer will count like this:  
... | C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1 | C, C, C, C, C, C, C, C | 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 | 1, 1, 1, ...  
In PWM mode, this bit has a different function. If the CTC0 or CTC2 bit is cleared in PWM mode, the Timer/Counter acts as  
an up/down counter. If the CTC0 or CTC2 bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter wraps when it reaches $FF. Refer to page 41  
for a detailed description.  
Bits 2,1,0 - CS02, CS01, CS00/ CS22, CS21, CS20: Clock Select bits 2,1 and 0  
The Clock Select bits 2,1 and 0 define the prescaling source of Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter2.  
Table 10. Clock 0 Prescale Select  
CS02  
CS01  
CS00  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Stop, the Timer/Counter0 is stopped.  
CK  
CK/8  
CK/64  
CK/256  
CK/1024  
External Pin PB0(T0), falling edge  
External Pin PB0(T0), rising edge  
39  
Table 11. Clock 2 Prescale Select  
CS22  
CS21  
CS20  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Stop, the Timer/Counter2 is stopped.  
PCK2  
PCK2/8  
PCK2/32  
PCK2/64  
PCK2/128  
PCK2/256  
PCK2/1024  
The Stop condition provides a Timer Enable/Disable function. The prescaled modes are scaled directly from the CK oscilla-  
tor clock for Timer/Counter0 and PCK2 for Timer/Counter2. If the external pin modes are used for Timer/Counter0,  
transitions on PB0/(T0) will clock the counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature can give the user SW  
control of the counting.  
Timer Counter0 TCNT0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$32 ($52)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
MSB  
R/W  
0
LSB  
R/W  
0
TCNT0  
TCNT2  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
Timer/Counter2 TCNT2  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$23 ($43)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
MSB  
R/W  
0
LSB  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
These 8-bit registers contain the value of the Timer/Counters.  
Both Timer/Counters is realized as up or up/down (in PWM mode) counters with read and write access. If the  
Timer/Counter is written to and a clock source is selected, it continues counting in the timer clock cycle following the write  
operation.  
Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register OCR0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$31 ($51)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
MSB  
R/W  
0
LSB  
R/W  
0
OCR0  
OCR2  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register OCR2  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$22 ($42)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
MSB  
R/W  
0
LSB  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
ATmega161(L)  
40  
 
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
The output compare registers are 8-bit read/write registers. The Timer/Counter Output Compare Registers contains the  
data to be continuously compared with the Timer/Counter. Actions on compare matches are specified in TCCR0 and  
TCCR2. A compare match does only occur if the Timer/Counter counts to the OCR value. A software write that sets  
Timer/Counter and Output Compare Register to the same value does not generate a compare match.  
A compare match will set the compare interrupt flag in the CPU clock cycle following the compare event.  
Timer/Counter 0 and 2 in PWM Mode  
When PWM mode is selected, the Timer/Counter either wraps (overflows) when it reaches $FF or it acts as an up/down  
counter.  
If the up/down mode is selected, the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare Registers OCR0 or OCR2 form an 8-bit,  
free-running, glitch-free and phase correct PWM with outputs on the PB0(OC0/PWM0) or PB1(OC2/PWM2) pin.  
If the overflow mode is selected, the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare Registers OCR0 or OCR2 form an 8-bit,  
free-running and glitch-free PWM, operating with twice the speed of the up/down counting mode.  
PWM Modes (Up/Down and Overflow)  
The two different PWM modes are selected by the CTC0 or CTC2 bit in the Timer/Counter Control Registers TCCR0 or  
TCCR2 respectively.  
If CTC0/CTC2 is cleared and PWM mode is selected, the Timer/Counter acts as an up/down counter, counting up from $00  
to $FF, where it turns and counts down again to zero before the cycle is repeated. When the counter value matches the  
contents of the Output Compare Register, the PB0(OC0/PWM0) or PB1(OC2/PWM2) pin is set or cleared according to the  
settings of the COMn1/COMn0 bits in the Timer/Counter Control Registers TCCR0 or TCCR2.  
If CTC0/CTC2 is set and PWM mode is selected, the Timer/Counters will wrap and start counting from $00 after reaching  
$FF. The PB0(OC0/PWM0) or PB1(OC2/PWM2) pin will be set or cleared according to the settings of COMn1/COMn0 on  
a Timer/Counter overflow or when the counter value matches the contents of the Output Compare Register. Refer to Table  
12 for details.  
Table 12. Compare Mode Select in PWM Mode  
CTCn  
COMn1  
COMn0  
Effect on Compare Pin  
Not connected  
Frequency  
0
0
0
0
0
1
Not connected  
Cleared on compare match, up-counting. Set on compare match,  
down-counting (non-inverted PWM).  
0
0
1
1
0
1
fTCK0/2/510  
Cleared on compare match, down-counting. Set on compare match,  
up-counting (inverted PWM).  
fTCK0/2/510  
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Not connected  
Not connected  
Cleared on compare match, set on overflow.  
Set on compare match, cleared on overflow.  
f
TCK0/2/256  
TCK0/2/256  
f
Note:  
n = 0 or 2  
Note that in PWM mode, the value to be written to the Output Compare Register is first transferred to a temporary location,  
and then latched into the OCR when the Timer/Counter reaches $FF. This prevents the occurrence of odd-length PWM  
pulses (glitches) in the event of an unsynchronized OCR0 or OCR2 write. See Figure 34 and Figure 35 for examples.  
41  
 
Figure 34. Effects of Unsynchronized OCR Latching in up/down mode  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OCn  
Synchronized OCn Latch  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OCn  
Glitch  
Unsynchronized OCn Latch  
Figure 35. Effects of Unsynchronized OCR Latching in overflow mode.  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OCn  
Synchronized OCn Latch  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OCn  
Glitch  
Unsynchronized OCn Latch  
n = 0 or 2 (Figure 34 and Figure 35)  
Note:  
During the time between the write and the latch operation, a read from the Output Compare Registers will read the contents  
of the temporary location. This means that the most recently written value always will read out of OCR0 and OCR2.  
When the Output Compare Register contains $00 or $FF, and the up/down PWM mode is selected, the output  
PB0(OC0/PWM0)/PB1(OC2/PWM2) is updated to low or high on the next compare match according to the settings of  
COMn1/COMn0. This is shown in Table 13. In overflow PWM mode, the output PB0(OC0/PWM0)/PB1(OC2/PWM2) is held  
low or high only when the Output Compare Register contains $FF.  
Table 13. PWM Outputs OCRn = $00 or $FF  
COMn1  
COMn0  
OCRn  
$00  
Output PWMn  
1
0
0
1
1
L
H
H
L
1
$FF  
$00  
1
1
$FF  
Note:  
n = 0 or 2  
In overflow PWM mode, the table above is only valid for OCRn = $FF.  
ATmega161(L)  
42  
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
In up/down PWM mode, the Timer Overflow Flag, TOV0 or TOV2, is set when the counter advances from $00. In overflow  
PWM mode, the Timer Overflow Flag is set as in normal Timer/Counter mode. Timer Overflow Interrupt0 and 2 operate  
exactly as in normal Timer/Counter mode, i.e. they are executed when TOV0 or TOV2 are set provided that Timer Overflow  
Interrupt and global interrupts are enabled. This does also apply to the Timer Output Compare flag and interrupt.  
Asynchronous Status Register ASSR  
Bit  
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
2
1
0
$26 ($46)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
AS2  
R/W  
0
TCN2UB OCR2UB TCR2UB ASSR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
Bit 7..4 - Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
Bit 3 - AS2: Asynchronous Timer/Counter2 mode  
When this bit is cleared (zero) Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the internal system clock, CK. If AS2 is set, the  
Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the TOSC1 pin. Pins PD4 and PD5 become connected to a crystal oscillator and cannot be  
used as general I/O pins. When the value of this bit is changed the contents of TCNT2, OCR2 and TCCR2 might get  
corrupted.  
Bit 2 - TCN2UB: Timer/Counter2 Update Busy  
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCNT2 is written, this bit becomes set (one). When TCNT2 has been  
updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared (zero) by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that  
TCNT2 is ready to be updated with a new value.  
Bit 1 - OCR2UB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy  
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2 is written, this bit becomes set (one). When OCR2 has been  
updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared (zero) by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that  
OCR2 is ready to be updated with a new value.  
Bit 0 - TCR2UB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy  
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2 is written, this bit becomes set (one). When TCCR2 has been  
updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared (zero) by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that  
TCCR2 is ready to be updated with a new value.  
If a write is performed to any of the three Timer/Counter2 registers while its update busy flag is set (one), the updated value  
might get corrupted and cause an unintentional interrupt to occur.  
The mechanisms for reading TCNT2, OCR2, and TCCR2 are different. When reading TCNT2, the actual timer value is  
read. When reading OCR2 or TCCR2, the value in the temporary storage register is read.  
Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2  
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously, some considerations must be taken.  
Warning: When switching between asynchronous and synchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2, the timer registers;  
TCNT2, OCR2 and TCCR2 might get corrupted. A safe procedure for switching clock source is:  
1. Disable the Timer/Counter2 interrupts by clearing OCIE2 and TOIE2.  
2. Select clock source by setting AS2 as appropriate.  
3. Write new values to TCNT2, OCR2, and TCCR2.  
4. To switch to asynchronous operation: Wait for TCN2UB, OCR2UB, and TCR2UB.  
5. Enable interrupts, if needed.  
The oscillator is optimized for use with a 32,768 Hz watch crystal. An external clock signal applied to this pin goes  
through the same amplifier having a bandwidth of 256 kHz. The external clock signal should therefore be in the interval  
0 Hz - 256 kHz. The frequency of the clock signal applied to the TOSC1 pin must be lower than one fourth of the CPU  
main clock frequency.  
43  
 
When writing to one of the registers TCNT2, OCR2, or TCCR2, the value is transferred to a temporary register, and  
latched after two positive edges on TOSC1. The user should not write a new value before the contents of the temporary  
register have been transferred to its destination. Each of the three mentioned registers have their individual temporary  
register, which means that e.g. writing to TCNT2 does not disturb an OCR2 write in progress. To detect that a transfer to  
the destination register has taken place, a Asynchronous Status Register ASSR has been implemented.  
When entering Power Save mode after having written to TCNT2, OCR2, or TCCR2, the user must wait until the written  
register has been updated if Timer/Counter2 is used to wake-up the device. Otherwise, the MCU will go to sleep before  
the changes have had any effect. This is extremely important if the Output Compare2 interrupt is used to wake-up the  
device; Output compare is disabled during write to OCR2 or TCNT2. If the write cycle is not finished (i.e. the MCU enters  
sleep mode before the OCR2UB bit returns to zero), the device will never get a compare match and the MCU will not  
wake-up.  
If Timer/Counter2 is used to wake-up the device from Power Save mode, precautions must be taken if the user wants to  
re-enter Power Save mode: The interrupt logic needs one TOSC1 cycle to be reset. If the time between wake-up and  
re-entering Power Save mode is less than one TOSC1 cycle, the interrupt will not occur and the device will fail to  
wake-up. If the user is in doubt whether the time before re-entering Power Save is sufficient, the following algorithm can  
be used to ensure that one TOSC1 cycle has elapsed:  
1. Write a value to TCCR2, TCNT2, or OCR2  
2. Wait until the corresponding Update Busy flag in ASSR returns to zero.  
3. Enter Power Save mode  
When asynchronous operation is selected, the 32 kHz oscillator for Timer/Counter2 is always running, except in power-  
down mode. After a power-up reset or wake-up from power-down, the user should be aware of the fact that this oscillator  
might take as long as one second to stabilize. Therefore, the contents of all Timer2 registers must be considered lost  
after a wake-up from power-down, due to the unstable clock signal. The user is advised to wait for at least one second  
before using Timer/Counter2 after power-up or wake-up from power-down.  
Description of wake-up from power save mode when the timer is clocked asynchronously: When the interrupt condition is  
met, the wake-up process is started on the following cycle of the timer clock, that is, the timer is always advanced by at  
least one before the processor can read the counter value. The interrupt flags are updated 3 processor cycles after the  
processor clock has started. During these cycles, the processor executes instructions, but the interrupt condition is not  
readable, and the interrupt routine has not started yet.  
During asynchronous operation, the synchronization of the interrupt flags for the asynchronous timer takes 3 processor  
cycles plus one timer cycle. The timer is therefore advanced by at least one before the processor can read the timer  
value causing the setting of the interrupt flag. The output compare pin is changed on the timer clock and is not  
synchronized to the processor clock.  
ATmega161(L)  
44  
ATmega161(L)  
Timer/Counter1.  
Figure 36 shows the block diagram for Timer/Counter1.  
Figure 36. Timer/Counter1 Block Diagram  
T/C1 OVER- T/C1 COMPARE  
T/C1 COMPARE  
MATCHB IRQ  
T/C1 INPUT  
CAPTURE IRQ  
FLOW IRQ  
MATCHA IRQ  
TIMER INT. MASK  
REGISTER (TIMSK)  
TIMER INT. FLAG  
REGISTER (TIFR)  
T/C1 CONTROL  
REGISTER A (TCCR1A)  
T/C1 CONTROL  
REGISTER B (TCCR1B)  
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS  
IO REGISTER (SFIOR)  
15  
8
7
0
0
CK  
T/C1 INPUT CAPTURE REGISTER (ICR1)  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
T1  
CAPTURE  
TRIGGER  
15  
8
7
T/C CLEAR  
T/C CLOCK SOURCE  
UP/DOWN  
TIMER/COUNTER1 (TCNT1)  
15  
15  
8
7
0
0
15  
8
7
0
0
16 BIT COMPARATOR  
16 BIT COMPARATOR  
8
7
15  
8
7
TIMER/COUNTER1 OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER A  
TIMER/COUNTER1 OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER B  
The 16-bit Timer/Counter1 can select clock source from CK, prescaled CK, or an external pin. In addition it can be stopped  
as described in section Timer/Counter1 Control Register B TCCR1Bon page 47. The different status flags (overflow,  
compare match and capture event) are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register TIFR. Control signals are  
found in the Timer/Counter1 Control Registers TCCR1A and TCCR1B. The interrupt enable/disable settings for  
Timer/Counter1 are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register TIMSK.  
When Timer/Counter1 is externally clocked, the external signal is synchronized with the oscillator frequency of the CPU. To  
assure proper sampling of the external clock, the minimum time between two external clock transitions must be at least one  
internal CPU clock period. The external clock signal is sampled on the rising edge of the internal CPU clock.  
The 16-bit Timer/Counter1 features both a high resolution and a high accuracy usage with the lower prescaling opportuni-  
ties. Similarly, the high prescaling opportunities makes the Timer/Counter1 useful for lower speed functions or exact timing  
functions with infrequent actions.  
45  
 
 
The Timer/Counter1 supports two Output Compare functions using the Output Compare Register 1 A and B OCR1A and  
OCR1B as the data sources to be compared to the Timer/Counter1 contents. The Output Compare functions include  
optional clearing of the counter on compareA match, and actions on the Output Compare pins on both compare matches.  
Timer/Counter1 can also be used as a 8-, 9- or 10-bit Pulse With Modulator. In this mode the counter and the  
OCR1A/OCR1B registers serve as a dual glitch-free stand-alone PWM with centered pulses. Alternatively, the  
Timer/Counter1 can be configured to operate at twice the speed in PWM mode, but without centered pulses. Refer to  
page 50 for a detailed description on this function.  
The Input Capture function of Timer/Counter1 provides a capture of the Timer/Counter1 contents to the Input Capture  
Register ICR1, triggered by an external event on the Input Capture Pin ICP. The actual capture event settings are  
defined by the Timer/Counter1 Control Register TCCR1B. In addition, the Analog Comparator can be set to trigger the  
Input Capture. Refer to the section, The Analog Comparator, for details on this. The ICP pin logic is shown in Figure 37.  
Figure 37. ICP Pin Schematic Diagram  
If the noise canceler function is enabled, the actual trigger condition for the capture event is monitored over 4 samples, and  
all 4 must be equal to activate the capture flag.  
Timer/Counter1 Control Register A TCCR1A  
Bit  
7
COM1A1  
R/W  
6
COM1A0  
R/W  
5
COM1B1  
R/W  
4
COM1B0  
R/W  
3
FOC1A  
R/w  
2
FOC1B  
R/W  
0
1
PWM11  
R/W  
0
0
PWM10  
R/W  
0
$2F ($4F)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
TCCR1A  
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7,6 - COM1A1, COM1A0: Compare Output Mode1A, bits 1 and 0  
The COM1A1 and COM1A0 control bits determine any output pin action following a compare match in Timer/Counter1.  
Any output pin actions affect pin OC1A Output CompareA pin 1. This is an alternative function to an I/O port, and the cor-  
responding direction control bit must be set (one) to control an output pin. The control configuration is shown in Table 14.  
Bits 5,4 - COM1B1, COM1B0: Compare Output Mode1B, bits 1 and 0  
The COM1B1 and COM1B0 control bits determine any output pin action following a compare match in Timer/Counter1.  
Any output pin actions affect pin OC1B Output CompareB. This is an alternative function to an I/O port, and the corre-  
sponding direction control bit must be set (one) to control an output pin. The following control configuration is given:  
Table 14. Compare 1 Mode Select  
COM1X1  
COM1X0  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Timer/Counter1 disconnected from output pin OC1X  
Toggle the OC1X output line.  
Clear the OC1X output line (to zero).  
Set the OC1X output line (to one).  
X = A or B  
In PWM mode, these bits have a different function. Refer to Table 18 for a detailed description.  
ATmega161(L)  
46  
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Bit 3 - FOC1A: Force Output Compare1A  
Writing a logical one to this bit, forces a change in the compare match output pin PD5 according to the values already set in  
COM1A1 and COM1A0. If the COM1A1 and COM1A0 bits are written in the same cycle as FOC1A, the new settings will  
not take effect until next compare match or forced compare match occurs. The Force Output Compare bit can be used to  
change the output pin without waiting for a compare match in the timer. The automatic action programmed in COM1A1 and  
COM1A0 happens as if a Compare Match had occurred, but no interrupt is generated and it will not clear the timer even if  
CTC1 in TCCR1B is set. The FOC1A bit will always be read as zero. The setting of the FOC1A bit has no effect in PWM  
mode.  
Bit 2 - FOC1B: Force Output Compare1B  
Writing a logical one to this bit, forces a change in the compare match output pin PE2 according to the values already set in  
COM1B1 and COM1B0. If the COM1B1 and COM1B0 bits are written in the same cycle as FOC1B, the new settings will  
not take effect until next compare match or forced compare match occurs. The Force Output Compare bit can be used to  
change the output pin without waiting for a compare match in the timer. The automatic action programmed in COM1B1 and  
COM1B0 happens as if a Compare Match had occurred, but no interrupt is generated. The FOC1B bit will always be read  
as zero. The setting of the FOC1B bit has no effect in PWM mode.  
Bits 1..0 - PWM11, PWM10: Pulse Width Modulator Select Bits  
These bits select PWM operation of Timer/Counter1 as specified in Table 15. This mode is described on page 50.  
Table 15. PWM Mode Select  
PWM11  
PWM10  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
PWM operation of Timer/Counter1 is disabled  
Timer/Counter1 is an 8-bit PWM  
Timer/Counter1 is a 9-bit PWM  
Timer/Counter1 is a 10-bit PWM  
Timer/Counter1 Control Register B TCCR1B  
Bit  
7
ICNC1  
R/W  
0
6
ICES1  
R/W  
0
5
-
4
-
3
CTC1  
R/W  
0
2
CS12  
R/W  
0
1
CS11  
R/W  
0
0
CS10  
R/W  
0
$2E ($4E)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
TCCR1B  
R
0
R
0
Bit 7 - ICNC1: Input Capture1 Noise Canceler (4 CKs)  
When the ICNC1 bit is cleared (zero), the input capture trigger noise canceler function is disabled. The input capture is trig-  
gered at the first rising/falling edge sampled on the ICP input capture pin as specified. When the ICNC1 bit is set (one),  
four successive samples are measures on the ICP input capture pin, and all samples must be high/low according to the  
input capture trigger specification in the ICES1 bit. The actual sampling frequency is XTAL clock frequency.  
Bit 6 - ICES1: Input Capture1 Edge Select  
While the ICES1 bit is cleared (zero), the Timer/Counter1 contents are transferred to the Input Capture Register ICR1 –  
on the falling edge of the input capture pin ICP. While the ICES1 bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 contents are trans-  
ferred to the Input Capture Register ICR1 on the rising edge of the input capture pin ICP.  
Bits 5, 4 - Res: Reserved bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read zero.  
Bit 3 - CTC1: Clear Timer/Counter1 on Compare Match  
When the CTC1 control bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 is reset to $0000 in the clock cycle after a compareA match. If  
the CTC1 control bit is cleared, Timer/Counter1 continues counting and is unaffected by a compare match. When a pres-  
caling of 1 is used, and the compareA register is set to C, the timer will count as follows if CTC1 is set:  
... | C-1 | C | 0 | 1 | ...  
When the prescaler is set to divide by 8, the timer will count like this:  
... | C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1 | C, C, C, C, C, C, C, C | 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 | ...  
47  
 
 
In PWM mode, this bit has a different function. If the CTC1 bit is cleared in PWM mode, the Timer/Counter1 acts as an  
up/down counter. If the CTC1 bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter wraps when it reaches the TOP value. Refer to page 50 for  
a detailed description.  
Bits 2,1,0 - CS12, CS11, CS10: Clock Select1, bit 2,1 and 0  
The Clock Select1 bits 2,1 and 0 define the prescaling source of Timer/Counter1.  
Table 16. Clock 1 Prescale Select  
CS12  
CS11  
CS10  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Stop, the Timer/Counter1 is stopped.  
CK  
CK/8  
CK/64  
CK/256  
CK/1024  
External Pin T1, falling edge  
External Pin T1, rising edge  
The Stop condition provides a Timer Enable/Disable function. The CK down divided modes are scaled directly from the CK  
oscillator clock. If the external pin modes are used for Timer/Counter1, transitions on PB1/(T1) will clock the counter even if  
the pin is configured as an output. This feature can give the user SW control of the counting.  
Timer/Counter1 Register TCNT1H AND TCNT1L  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
$2D ($4D)  
$2C ($4C)  
MSB  
TCNT1H  
TCNT1L  
LSB  
0
7
R/W  
R/W  
0
6
R/W  
R/W  
0
5
R/W  
R/W  
0
4
R/W  
R/W  
0
3
R/W  
R/W  
0
2
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
R/W  
R/W  
0
Read/Write  
Initial value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
This 16-bit register contains the prescaled value of the 16-bit Timer/Counter1. To ensure that both the high and low bytes  
are read and written simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit tem-  
porary register (TEMP). This temporary register is also used when accessing OCR1A, OCR1B and ICR1. If the main  
program and also interrupt routines perform access to registers using TEMP, interrupts must be disabled during access  
from the main program and interrupt routines.  
TCNT1 Timer/Counter1 Write:  
When the CPU writes to the high byte TCNT1H, the written data is placed in the TEMP register. Next, when the CPU writes  
the low byte TCNT1L, this byte of data is combined with the byte data in the TEMP register, and all 16 bits are written to the  
TCNT1 Timer/Counter1 register simultaneously. Consequently, the high byte TCNT1H must be accessed first for a full  
16-bit register write operation.  
TCNT1 Timer/Counter1 Read:  
When the CPU reads the low byte TCNT1L, the data of the low byte TCNT1L is sent to the CPU and the data of the high  
byte TCNT1H is placed in the TEMP register. When the CPU reads the data in the high byte TCNT1H, the CPU receives  
the data in the TEMP register. Consequently, the low byte TCNT1L must be accessed first for a full 16-bit register read  
operation.  
The Timer/Counter1 is realized as an up or up/down (in PWM mode) counter with read and write access. If Timer/Counter1  
is written to and a clock source is selected, the Timer/Counter1 continues counting in the timer clock cycle after it is preset  
with the written value.  
ATmega161(L)  
48  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register OCR1AH AND OCR1AL  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
$2B ($4B)  
$2A ($4A)  
MSB  
OCR1AH  
LSB  
0
OCR1AL  
7
R/W  
R/W  
0
6
R/W  
R/W  
0
5
R/W  
R/W  
0
4
R/W  
R/W  
0
3
R/W  
R/W  
0
2
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
R/W  
R/W  
0
Read/Write  
Initial value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register OCR1BH AND OCR1BL  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
$29 ($49)  
$28 ($48)  
MSB  
OCR1BH  
OCR1BL  
LSB  
0
7
R/W  
R/W  
0
6
R/W  
R/W  
0
5
R/W  
R/W  
0
4
R/W  
R/W  
0
3
R/W  
R/W  
0
2
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
R/W  
R/W  
0
Read/Write  
Initial value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The output compare registers are 16-bit read/write registers.  
The Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Registers contain the data to be continuously compared with Timer/Counter1.  
Actions on compare matches are specified in the Timer/Counter1 Control and Status register. A compare match does only  
occur if Timer/Counter1 counts to the OCR value. A software write that sets TCNT1 and OCR1A or OCR1B to the same  
value does not generate a compare match.  
A compare match will set the compare interrupt flag in the CPU clock cycle following the compare event.  
Since the Output Compare Registers OCR1A and OCR1B are 16-bit registers, a temporary register TEMP is used  
when OCR1A/B are written to ensure that both bytes are updated simultaneously. When the CPU writes the high byte,  
OCR1AH or OCR1BH, the data is temporarily stored in the TEMP register. When the CPU writes the low byte, OCR1AL or  
OCR1BL, the TEMP register is simultaneously written to OCR1AH or OCR1BH. Consequently, the high byte OCR1AH or  
OCR1BH must be written first for a full 16-bit register write operation.  
The TEMP register is also used when accessing TCNT1, and ICR1. If the main program and also interrupt routines perform  
access to registers using TEMP, interrupts must be disabled during access from the main program and interrupt routines.  
Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register ICR1H AND ICR1L  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
$25 ($45)  
$24 ($44)  
MSB  
ICR1H  
ICR1L  
LSB  
0
7
R
R
0
6
R
R
0
5
R
R
0
4
R
R
0
3
R
R
0
2
R
R
0
1
R
R
0
Read/Write  
Initial value  
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The input capture register is a 16-bit read-only register.  
When the rising or falling edge (according to the input capture edge setting ICES1) of the signal at the input capture pin –  
ICP is detected, the current value of the Timer/Counter1 Register TCNT1 is transferred to the Input Capture Register –  
ICR1. In the same cycle, the input capture flag ICF1 is set (one).  
Since the Input Capture Register ICR1 is a 16-bit register, a temporary register TEMP is used when ICR1 is read to  
ensure that both bytes are read simultaneously. When the CPU reads the low byte ICR1L, the data is sent to the CPU and  
the data of the high byte ICR1H is placed in the TEMP register. When the CPU reads the data in the high byte ICR1H, the  
CPU receives the data in the TEMP register. Consequently, the low byte ICR1L must be accessed first for a full 16-bit reg-  
ister read operation.  
49  
 
 
 
The TEMP register is also used when accessing TCNT1, OCR1A and OCR1B. If the main program and also interrupt rou-  
tines perform access to registers using TEMP, interrupts must be disabled during access from the main program and  
interrupt routine.  
Timer/Counter1 in PWM Mode  
When the PWM mode is selected, Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Register1A OCR1A and the Output Com-  
pare Register1B OCR1B, form a dual 8, 9 or 10-bit, free-running, glitch-free and phase correct PWM with outputs on the  
PD5(OC1A) and PE2(OC1B) pins. In this mode the Timer/Counter1 acts as an up/down counter, counting up from $0000 to  
TOP (see Table 17), where it turns and counts down again to zero before the cycle is repeated. When the counter value  
matches the contents of the 8,9 or 10 least significant bits (depends of the resolution) of OCR1A or OCR1B, the  
PD5(OC1A)/PE2(OC1B) pins are set or cleared according to the settings of the COM1A1/COM1A0 or COM1B1/COM1B0  
bits in the Timer/Counter1 Control Register TCCR1A. Refer to Table 18 for details.  
Alternatively, the Timer/Counter1 can be configured to a PWM that operates at twice the speed as in the mode described  
above. Then the Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Register1A OCR1A and the Output Compare Register1B –  
OCR1B, form a dual 8, 9 or 10-bit, free-running and glitch-free PWM with outputs on the PD5(OC1A) and PE2(OC1B) pins.  
Table 17. Timer TOP Values and PWM Frequency  
CTC1  
PWM11  
PWM10  
PWM Resolution  
Timer TOP value  
$00FF (255)  
$01FF (511)  
$03FF(1023)  
$00FF (255)  
$01FF (511)  
$03FF(1023)  
Frequency  
TCK1/510  
TCK1/1022  
fTCK1/2046  
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
8-bit  
9-bit  
f
0
f
0
10-bit  
8-bit  
1
f
f
TCK1/256  
TCK1/512  
1
9-bit  
1
10-bit  
fTCK1/1024  
Note:  
X = A or B  
As shown in Table 17, the PWM operates at either 8-, 9- or 10 bits resolution. Note the unused bits in OCR1A, OCR1B and  
TCNT1 will automatically be written to zero by hardware. I.e. bit 9 to 15 will be set to zero in OCR1A, OCR1B and TCNT1 if  
the 9-bit PWM resolution is selected. This makes it possible for the user to perform read-modify-write operations in any of  
the three resolution modes and the unused bits will be treated as dont care.  
Table 18. Compare1 Mode Select in PWM Mode  
CTC1 COM1X1 COM1X0 Effect on OCX1  
0
0
0
0
0
1
Not connected  
Not connected  
Cleared on compare match, up-counting. Set on compare match,  
down-counting (non-inverted PWM).  
0
0
1
1
0
1
Cleared on compare match, down-counting. Set on compare match,  
up-counting (inverted PWM).  
1
0
0
1
0
1
Not connected  
1
1
0
Not connected  
1
1
Cleared on compare match, set on overflow.  
Set on compare match, cleared on overflow.  
1
Note:  
X = A or B  
ATmega161(L)  
50  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Note that in the PWM mode, the 8, 9 or 10 least significant OCR1A/OCR1B bits (depends of resolution), when written, are  
transferred to a temporary location. They are latched when Timer/Counter1 reaches the value TOP. This prevents the  
occurrence of odd-length PWM pulses (glitches) in the event of an unsynchronized OCR1A/OCR1B write. See Figure 38  
and Figure 39 for an example in each mode.  
Figure 38. Effects on Unsynchronized OCR1 Latching  
Compare Value changes  
Counter alue  
V
Compare V  
alue  
Output OC1X  
PWM  
Synchronized  
OCR1X Latch  
Compare Value changes  
Counter  
Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OC1X  
Glitch  
Unsynchronized  
OCR1X Latch  
Note: X = A or B  
Figure 39. Effects of Unsynchronized OCR1 Latching in overflow mode.  
PWM Output OC1x  
Synchronized OC1x Latch  
PWM Output OC1x  
Unsynchronized OC1x Latch  
Note: X = A or B  
During the time between the write and the latch operation, a read from OCR1A or OCR1B will read the contents of the tem-  
porary location. This means that the most recently written value always will read out of OCR1A/B.  
When the OCR1X contains $0000 or TOP, and the up/down PWM mode is selected, the output OC1A/OC1B is updated to  
low or high on the next compare match according to the settings of COM1A1/COM1A0 or COM1B1/COM1B0. This is  
shown in Table 19. In overflow PWM mode, the output OC1A/OC1B is held low or high only when the Output Compare  
Register contains TOP.  
51  
 
 
Table 19. PWM Outputs OCR1X = $0000 or TOP  
COM1X1  
COM1X0  
OCR1X  
$0000  
TOP  
Output OC1X  
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
L
H
H
L
$0000  
TOP  
1
Note:  
X = A or B  
In overflow PWM mode, the table above is only valid for OCR1X = TOP.  
In up/down PWM mode, the Timer Overflow Flag1, TOV1, is set when the counter advances from $0000. In overflow PWM  
mode, the Timer Overflow flag is set as in normal Timer/Counter mode. Timer Overflow Interrupt1 operates exactly as in  
normal Timer/Counter mode, i.e. it is executed when TOV1 is set provided that Timer Overflow Interrupt1 and global inter-  
rupts are enabled. This does also apply to the Timer Output Compare1 flags and interrupts.  
Watchdog Timer  
The Watchdog Timer is clocked from a separate on-chip oscillator which runs at 1MHz. This is the typical value at VCC  
=
5V. See characterization data for typical values at other VCC levels. By controlling the Watchdog Timer prescaler, the  
Watchdog reset interval can be adjusted, see Table 20 on page 53 for a detailed description. The WDR Watchdog Reset  
instruction resets the Watchdog Timer. Eight different clock cycle periods can be selected to determine the reset period.  
If the reset period expires without another Watchdog reset, the ATmega161 resets and executes from the reset vector. For  
timing details on the Watchdog reset, refer to page 27.  
To prevent unintentional disabling of the watchdog, a special turn-off sequence must be followed when the watchdog is dis-  
abled.Refer to the description of the Watchdog Timer Control Register for details.  
Figure 40. Watchdog Timer  
ATmega161(L)  
52  
ATmega161(L)  
Watchdog Timer Control Register WDTCR  
Bit  
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
WDTOE  
R/W  
0
3
WDE  
R/W  
0
2
WDP2  
R/W  
0
1
WDP1  
R/W  
0
0
$21 ($41)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
WDP0  
R/W  
0
WDTCR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
Bits 7..5 - Res: Reserved bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and will always read as zero.  
Bit 4 - WDTOE: Watch Dog Turn-off Enable  
This bit must be set (one) when the WDE bit is cleared. Otherwise, the watchdog will not be disabled. Once set, hardware  
will clear this bit to zero after four clock cycles. Refer to the description of the WDE bit for a watchdog disable procedure.  
Bit 3 - WDE: Watch Dog Enable  
When the WDE is set (one) the Watchdog Timer is enabled, and if the WDE is cleared (zero) the Watchdog Timer function  
is disabled. WDE can only be cleared if the WDTOE bit is set(one). To disable an enabled watchdog timer, the following  
procedure must be followed:  
1. In the same operation, write a logical one to WDTOE and WDE. A logical one must be written to WDE even though  
it is set to one before the disable operation starts.  
2. Within the next four clock cycles, write a logical 0 to WDE. This disables the watchdog.  
Bits 2..0 - WDP2, WDP1, WDP0: Watch Dog Timer Prescaler 2, 1 and 0  
The WDP2, WDP1 and WDP0 bits determine the Watchdog Timer prescaling when the Watchdog Timer is enabled. The  
different prescaling values and their corresponding Time-out Periods are shown in Table 20.  
Table 20. Watch Dog Timer Prescale Select  
Typical time-out  
at Vcc = 3.0V  
Typical time-out  
at Vcc = 5.0V  
Number of WDT  
Oscillator cycles  
WDP2  
WDP1  
WDP0  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
16K cycles  
47 ms  
94 ms  
0.19 s  
0.38 s  
0.75 s  
1.5 s  
15 ms  
30 ms  
60 ms  
0.12 s  
0,24 s  
0.49 s  
0.97 s  
1.9 s  
32K cycles  
64K cycles  
128K cycles  
256K cycles  
512K cycles  
1,024K cycles  
2,048K cycles  
3.0 s  
6.0 s  
Note:  
The frequency of the watchdog oscillator is voltage dependent as shown in the Electrical Characteristics section.  
The WDR Watchdog Reset instruction should always be executed before the Watchdog Timer is enabled. This ensures that  
the reset period will be in accordance with the Watchdog Timer prescale settings. If the Watchdog Timer is enabled without  
reset, the watchdog timer may not start counting from zero.  
53  
 
 
EEPROM Read/Write Access  
The EEPROM access registers are accessible in the I/O space.  
The write access time is in the range of 2.5 - 4 ms, depending on the VCC voltages. A self-timing function, however, lets the  
user software detect when the next byte can be written. If the user code contains code that writes the EEPROM, some pre-  
caution must be taken. In heavily filtered power supplies, VCC is likely to rise or fall slowly on power-up/down. This causes  
the device for some period of time to run at a voltage lower than specified as minimum for the clock frequency used. CPU  
operation under these conditions is likely cause the program counter to perform unintentional jumps and eventually execute  
the EEPROM write code. To secure EEPROM integrity, the user is advised to use an external under-voltage reset circuit in  
this case.  
In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a specific write procedure must be followed. Refer to the description of  
the EEPROM Control Register for details on this.  
When the EEPROM is read or written, the CPU is halted for two clock cycles before the next instruction is executed.  
EEPROM Address Register EEARH and EEARL  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
EEAR8  
EEAR0  
0
$1F ($3F)  
$1E ($3E)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
EEARH  
EEARL  
EEAR7  
EEAR6  
EEAR5  
EEAR4  
EEAR3  
EEAR2  
EEAR1  
7
R
6
R
5
R
4
R
3
R
2
R
1
R
Read/Write  
Initial value  
R/W  
R/W  
X
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bits 15..9 - Res: Reserved bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and will always read as zero.  
Bits 8..0 - EEAR8..0: EEPROM Address  
The EEPROM Address Registers EEARH and EEARL specify the EEPROM address in the 512 bytes EEPROM space.  
The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly between 0 and 511. The initial value of EEAR is undefined. A proper value  
must be written before the EEPROM may be accessed.  
EEPROM Data Register EEDR  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$1D ($3D)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
EEDR  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
Bits 7..0 - EEDR7..0: EEPROM Data  
For the EEPROM write operation, the EEDR register contains the data to be written to the EEPROM in the address given  
by the EEAR register. For the EEPROM read operation, the EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the  
address given by EEAR.  
EEPROM Control Register EECR  
Bit  
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
EERIE  
R/W  
0
2
EEMWE  
R/W  
0
1
EEWE  
R/W  
0
0
EERE  
R/W  
0
$1C ($3C)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
EECR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
Bit 7..4 - Res: Reserved bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and will always read as zero.  
ATmega161(L)  
54  
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Bit 3 - EERIE: EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable  
When the I bit in SREG and EERIE are set (one), the EEPROM Ready Interrupt is enabled. When cleared (zero), the inter-  
rupt is disabled. The EEPROM Ready interrupt generates a constant interrupt when EEWE is cleared (zero).  
Bit 2 - EEMWE: EEPROM Master Write Enable  
The EEMWE bit determines whether setting EEWE to one causes the EEPROM to be written. When EEMWE is set(one)  
setting EEWE will write data to the EEPROM at the selected address. If EEMWE is zero, setting EEWE will have no effect.  
When EEMWE has been set (one) by software, hardware clears the bit to zero after four clock cycles. See the description  
of the EEWE bit for an EEPROM write procedure.  
Bit 1 - EEWE: EEPROM Write Enable  
The EEPROM Write Enable Signal EEWE is the write strobe to the EEPROM. When address and data are correctly set up,  
the EEWE bit must be set to write the value into the EEPROM. The EEMWE bit must be set when the logical one is written  
to EEWE, otherwise no EEPROM write takes place. The following procedure should be followed when writing the  
EEPROM (the order of steps 2 and 3 is not essential):  
1. Wait until EEWE becomes zero.  
2. Write new EEPROM address to EEAR (optional).  
3. Write new EEPROM data to EEDR (optional).  
4. Write a logical one to the EEMWE bit in EECR.  
5. Within four clock cycles after setting EEMWE, write a logical one to EEWE.  
Caution: An interrupt between step 4 and step 5 will make the write cycle fail, since the EEPROM Master Write Enable will  
time-out. If an interrupt routine accessing the EEPROM is interrupting another EEPROM access, the EEAR or EEDR regis-  
ter will be modified, causing the interrupted EEPROM access to fail. It is recommended to have the global interrupt flag  
cleared during the 4 last steps to avoid these problems.  
When the write access time (typically 2.5 ms at VCC = 5V or 4 ms at VCC = 2.7V) has elapsed, the EEWE bit is cleared  
(zero) by hardware. The user software can poll this bit and wait for a zero before writing the next byte. When EEWE has  
been set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction is executed.  
Bit 0 - EERE: EEPROM Read Enable  
The EEPROM Read Enable Signal EERE is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When the correct address is set up in the  
EEAR register, the EERE bit must be set. When the EERE bit is cleared (zero) by hardware, requested data is found in the  
EEDR register. The EEPROM read access takes one instruction and there is no need to poll the EERE bit. When EERE  
has been set, the CPU is halted for four cycles before the next instruction is executed.  
The user should poll the EEWE bit before starting the read operation. If a write operation is in progress when new data or  
address is written to the EEPROM I/O registers, the write operation will be interrupted, and the result is undefined.  
Prevent EEPROM Corruption  
During periods of low VCC, the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply voltage is too low for the CPU and the  
EEPROM to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board level systems using the EEPROM, and the same  
design solutions should be applied.  
An EEPROM data corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a regular write sequence  
to the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incor-  
rectly, if the supply voltage for executing instructions is too low.  
EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (one is sufficient):  
1. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can be done by enabling  
the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD) if the operating voltage matches the detection level. If not, an external low  
VCC Reset Protection circuit can be applied.  
2. Keep the AVR core in Power-down Sleep Mode during periods of low VCC. This will prevent the CPU from attempt-  
ing to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting the EEPROM registers from unintentional writes.  
3. Store constants in Flash memory if the ability to change memory contents from software is not required. Flash  
memory can not be updated by the CPU, and will not be subject to corruption.  
55  
Serial Peripheral Interface SPI  
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the ATmega161 and peripheral  
devices or between several AVR devices. The ATmega161 SPI features include the following:  
Full-duplex, 3-wire Synchronous Data Transfer  
Master or Slave Operation  
LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer  
Seven Programmable Bit Rates  
End of Transmission Interrupt Flag  
Write Collision Flag Protection  
Wake-up from Idle Mode (Slave Mode Only)  
Double Speed (CK/2) Master SPI Mode  
Figure 41. SPI Block Diagram  
DIVIDER  
/2/4/8/16/32/64/128  
ATmega161(L)  
56  
ATmega161(L)  
The interconnection between master and slave CPUs with SPI is shown in Figure 42. The PB7(SCK) pin is the clock output  
in the master mode and is the clock input in the slave mode. Writing to the SPI data register of the master CPU starts the  
SPI clock generator, and the data written shifts out of the PB5(MOSI) pin and into the PB5(MOSI) pin of the slave CPU.  
After shifting one byte, the SPI clock generator stops, setting the end of transmission flag (SPIF). If the SPI interrupt enable  
bit (SPIE) in the SPCR register is set, an interrupt is requested. The Slave Select input, PB4(SS), is set low to select an  
individual slave SPI device. The two shift registers in the Master and the Slave can be considered as one distributed 16-bit  
circular shift register. This is shown in Figure 42. When data is shifted from the master to the slave, data is also shifted in  
the opposite direction, simultaneously. This means that during one shift cycle, data in the master and the slave are  
interchanged.  
Figure 42. SPI Master-slave Interconnection  
The system is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the receive direction. This means that bytes to  
be transmitted cannot be written to the SPI Data Register before the entire shift cycle is completed. When receiving data,  
however, a received byte must be read from the SPI Data Register before the next byte has been completely shifted in.  
Otherwise, the first byte is lost.  
When the SPIisenabled, the data direction of the MOSI, MISO, SCK and SS pinsisoverridden according to the following table:  
Table 21. SPI Pin Overrides  
Pin  
MOSI  
MISO  
SCK  
SS  
Direction, Master SPI  
User Defined  
Input  
Direction, Slave SPI  
Input  
User Defined  
Input  
User Defined  
User Defined  
Input  
Note:  
See Alternate functions of Port Bon page 80 for a detailed description of how to define the direction of the user defined  
SPI pins.  
57  
 
SS Pin Functionality  
When the SPI is configured as a master (MSTR in SPCR is set), the user can determine the direction of the SS pin. If SS is  
configured as an output, the pin is a general output pin which does not affect the SPI system. If SS is configured as an  
input, it must be hold high to ensure Master SPI operation. If the SS pin is driven low by peripheral circuitry when the SPI is  
configured as master with the SS pin defined as an input, the SPI system interprets this as another master selecting the  
SPI as a slave and starting to send data to it. To avoid bus contention, the SPI system takes the following actions:  
1. The MSTR bit in SPCR is cleared and the SPI system becomes a slave. As a result of the SPI becoming a slave,  
the MOSI and SCK pins become inputs.  
2. The SPIF flag in SPSR is set, and if the SPI interrupt is enabled and the I-bit in SREG is set, the interrupt routine will  
be executed.  
Thus, when interrupt-driven SPI transmission is used in master mode, and there exists a possibility that SS is driven low,  
the interrupt should always check that the MSTR bit is still set. Once the MSTR bit has been cleared by a slave select, it  
must be set by the user to re-enable SPI master mode.  
When the SPI is configured as a slave, the SS pin is always input. When SS is held low, the SPI is activated and MISO  
becomes an output if configured so by the user. All other pins are inputs. When SS is driven high, all pins are inputs, and  
the SPI is passive, which means that it will not receive incoming data. Note that the SPI logic will be reset once the SS pin  
is brought high. If the SS pin is brought high during a transmission, the SPI will stop sending and receiving immediately and  
both data received and data sent must be considered as lost.  
Data Modes  
There are four combinations of SCK phase and polarity with respect to serial data, which are determined by control bits  
CPHA and CPOL. The SPI data transfer formats are shown in Figure 43 and Figure 44.  
Figure 43. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 0 and DORD = 0  
Figure 44. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 1 and DORD = 0  
ATmega161(L)  
58  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
SPI Control Register SPCR  
Bit  
7
SPIE  
R/W  
0
6
5
DORD  
R/W  
0
4
MSTR  
R/W  
0
3
CPOL  
R/W  
0
2
CPHA  
R/W  
0
1
SPR1  
R/W  
0
0
$0D ($2D)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
SPE  
R/W  
0
SPR0  
R/W  
0
SPCR  
Bit 7 - SPIE: SPI Interrupt Enable  
This bit causes the SPI interrupt to be executed if SPIF bit in the SPSR register is set and the if the global interrupt enable  
bit in SREG is set.  
Bit 6 - SPE: SPI Enable  
When the SPE bit is set (one), the SPI is enabled. This bit must be set to enable any SPI operations.  
Bit 5 - DORD: Data Order  
When the DORD bit is set (one), the LSB of the data word is transmitted first.  
When the DORD bit is cleared (zero), the MSB of the data word is transmitted first.  
Bit 4 - MSTR: Master/Slave Select  
This bit selects Master SPI mode when set (one), and Slave SPI mode when cleared (zero). If SS is configured as an input  
and is driven low while MSTR is set, MSTR will be cleared, and SPIF in SPSR will become set. The user will then have to  
set MSTR to re-enable SPI master mode.  
Bit 3 - CPOL: Clock Polarity  
When this bit is set (one), SCK is high when idle. When CPOL is cleared (zero), SCK is low when idle. Refer to Figure 43  
and Figure 44 for additional information.  
Bit 2 - CPHA: Clock Phase  
Refer to Figure 43 or Figure 44 for the functionality of this bit.  
Bits 1,0 - SPR1, SPR0: SPI Clock Rate Select 1 and 0  
These two bits control the SCK rate of the device configured as a master. SPR1 and SPR0 have no effect on the slave. The  
relationship between SCK and the Oscillator Clock frequency fcl is shown in Table 22:  
Table 22. Relationship Between SCK and the Oscillator Frequency  
SPI2X  
SPR1  
SPR0  
SCK Frequency  
fcl/4  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
fcl/16  
fcl/64  
fcl/128  
fcl/2  
fcl/8  
fcl/32  
fcl/64  
Note:  
When the SPI is configured as Slave, the SPI is only guaranteed to work at fcl/4.  
SPI Status Register SPSR  
Bit  
7
SPIF  
R
6
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
0
SPI2X  
R/W  
0
$0E ($2E)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
WCOL  
SPSR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
59  
 
 
 
Bit 7 - SPIF: SPI Interrupt Flag  
When a serial transfer is complete, the SPIF bit is set (one) and an interrupt is generated if SPIE in SPCR is set (one) and  
global interrupts are enabled. If SS is an input and is driven low when the SPI is in master mode, this will also set the SPIF  
flag. SPIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, the SPIF bit is  
cleared by first reading the SPI status register with SPIF set (one), then accessing the SPI Data Register (SPDR).  
Bit 6 - WCOL: Write COLlision flag  
The WCOL bit is set if the SPI data register (SPDR) is written during a data transfer. The WCOL bit (and the SPIF bit) are  
cleared (zero) by first reading the SPI Status Register with WCOL set (one), and then accessing the SPI Data Register.  
Bit 5..1 - Res: Reserved bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and will always read as zero.  
Bit 0 - SPI2X: Double SPI speed bit  
When this bit is set (one) the SPI speed (SCK Frequency) will be doubled when the SPI is in master mode (see Table 22).  
This means that the maximum SCK period will be 2 CPU clock periods. When the SPI is configured as Slave, the SPI is  
only guaranteed to work at fcl/4.  
The SPI interface on the ATmega161 is also used for program memory and EEPROM downloading or uploading. See  
page 109 for serial programming and verification.  
SPI Data Register SPDR  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
x
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$0F ($2F)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSB  
R/W  
x
SPDR  
R/W  
x
R/W  
x
R/W  
x
R/W  
x
R/W  
x
R/W  
x
Undefined  
The SPI Data Register is a read/write register used for data transfer between the register file and the SPI Shift register.  
Writing to the register initiates data transmission. Reading the register causes the Shift Register Receive buffer to be read.  
UARTs  
The ATmega161 features two full duplex (separate receive and transmit registers) Universal Asynchronous Receiver and  
Transmitter (UART). The main features are:  
Baud Rate Generator Generates any Baud Rate  
High Baud Rates at Low XTAL Frequencies  
8 or 9 Bits Data  
Noise Filtering  
Overrun Detection  
Framing Error Detection  
False Start Bit Detection  
Three Separate Interrupts on TX Complete, TX Data Register Empty and RX Complete  
Multi-processor Communication Mode  
Double Speed UART Mode  
Data Transmission  
A block schematic of the UART transmitter is shown in Figure 45. The two UARTs are identical and the functionality is  
described in general for the two UARTs.  
ATmega161(L)  
60  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 45. UART Transmitter  
DATA BUS  
BAUD x 16  
UART I/O DATA  
REGISTER (UDRn)  
BAUD RATE  
GENERATOR  
/16  
XTAL  
STORE UDRn  
SHIFT ENABLE  
PIN CONTROL  
LOGIC  
TXDn  
BAUD  
10(11)-BIT TX  
PD1/  
CONTROL LOGIC  
SHIFT REGISTER  
PB3  
IDLE  
UART CONTROL AND  
STATUS REGISTER  
(UCSRnB)  
UART CONTROL AND  
STATUS REGISTER  
(UCSRnA)  
DATA BUS  
TXCn  
IRQ  
UDREn  
IRQ  
n = 0,1  
Data transmission is initiated by writing the data to be transmitted to the UART I/O Data Register, UDRn. Data is trans-  
ferred from UDRn to the Transmit shift register when:  
A new character has been written to UDRn after the stop bit from the previous character has been shifted out. The shift  
register is loaded immediately.  
A new character has been written to UDRn before the stop bit from the previous character has been shifted out. The shift  
register is loaded when the stop bit of the character currently being transmitted has been shifted out.  
If the 10(11)-bit Transmitter shift register is empty, data is transferred from UDRn to the shift register. At this time the  
UDREn (UART Data Register Empty) bit in the UART Control and Status Register, UCSRnA, is set. When this bit is set  
(one), the UART is ready to receive the next character. At the same time as the data is transferred from UDRn to the  
10(11)-bit shift register, bit 0 of the shift register is cleared (start bit) and bit 9 or 10 is set (stop bit). If 9 bit data word is  
selected (the CHR9n bit in the UART Control and Status Register, UCSRnB is set), the TXB8 bit in UCSRnB is transferred  
to bit 9 in the Transmit shift register.  
On the Baud Rate clock following the transfer operation to the shift register, the start bit is shifted out on the TXDn pin.  
Then follows the data, LSB first. When the stop bit has been shifted out, the shift register is loaded if any new data has  
been written to the UDRn during the transmission. During loading, UDREn is set. If there is no new data in the UDRn regis-  
ter to send when the stop bit is shifted out, the UDREn flag will remain set until UDRn is written again. When no new data  
has been written, and the stop bit has been present on TXDn for one bit length, the TX Complete flag, TXCn, in UCSRnA  
is set.  
61  
The TXENn bit in UCSRnB enables the UART transmitter when set (one). When this bit is cleared (zero), the PD1 (UART0)  
or PB3 (UART1) pin can be used for general I/O. When TXENn is set, the UART Transmitter will be connected to PD1  
(UART0) or PB3 (UART1), which is forced to be an output pin regardless of the setting of the DDD1 bit in DDRD (UART0)  
or DDB3 in DDRB (UART1). Note that PB3 (UART1) also is used as one of the input pins to the Analog Comparator. It is  
therefore not recommended to use UART1 if the Analog Comparator also is used in the application at the same time.  
Data Reception  
Figure 46 shows a block diagram of the UART Receiver  
Figure 46. UART Receiver  
DATA BUS  
UART I/O DATA  
REGISTER (UDRn)  
BAUD x 16  
BAUD  
BAUD RATE  
GENERATOR  
/16  
XTAL  
STORE UDRn  
PIN CONTROL  
LOGIC  
RXDn  
10(11)-BIT RX  
SHIFT REGISTER  
PD0/  
PB2  
DATA RECOVERY  
LOGIC  
UART CONTROL AND  
STATUS REGISTER  
(UCSRnB)  
UART CONTROL AND  
STATUS REGISTER  
(UCSRnA)  
DATA BUS  
RXCn  
IRQ  
n = 0,1  
The receiver front-end logic samples the signal on the RXDn pin at a frequency 16 times the baud rate. While the line is  
idle, one single sample of logical zero will be interpreted as the falling edge of a start bit, and the start bit detection  
sequence is initiated. Let sample 1 denote the first zero-sample. Following the 1 to 0-transition, the receiver samples the  
RXDn pin at samples 8, 9 and 10. If two or more of these three samples are found to be logical ones, the start bit is rejected  
as a noise spike and the receiver starts looking for the next 1 to 0-transition.  
If however, a valid start bit is detected, sampling of the data bits following the start bit is performed. These bits are also  
sampled at samples 8, 9 and 10. The logical value found in at least two of the three samples is taken as the bit value. All  
bits are shifted into the transmitter shift register as they are sampled. Sampling of an incoming character is shown in Figure  
47. Note that the description above is not valid when the UART transmission speed is doubled. See Double Speed Trans-  
missionon page 68 for a detailed description.  
ATmega161(L)  
62  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 47. Sampling Received Data  
Note:  
This figure is not valid when the UART speed is doubled. SeeDouble Speed Transmissionon page 68 for a detailed  
description.  
When the stop bit enters the receiver, the majority of the three samples must be one to accept the stop bit. If two or more  
samples are logical zeros, the Framing Error (FEn) flag in the UART Control and Status Register (UCSRnA) is set. Before  
reading the UDRn register, the user should always check the FEn bit to detect Framing Errors.  
Whether or not a valid stop bit is detected at the end of a character reception cycle, the data is transferred to UDRn and the  
RXCn flag in UCSRnA is set. UDRn is in fact two physically separate registers, one for transmitted data and one for  
received data. When UDRn is read, the Receive Data register is accessed, and when UDRn is written, the Transmit Data  
register is accessed. If 9 bit data word is selected (the CHR9n bit in the UART Control and Status Register, UCSRnB is  
set), the RXB8n bit in UCSRnB is loaded with bit 9 in the Transmit shift register when data is transferred to UDRn.  
If, after having received a character, the UDRn register has not been read since the last receive, the OverRun (ORn) flag in  
UCSRnB is set. This means that the last data byte shifted into to the shift register could not be transferred to UDRn and has  
been lost. The ORn bit is buffered, and is updated when the valid data byte in UDRn is read. Thus, the user should always  
check the ORn bit after reading the UDRn register in order to detect any overruns if the baud rate is high or CPU load is  
high.  
When the RXEN bit in the UCSRnB register is cleared (zero), the receiver is disabled. This means that the PD0 pin can be  
used as a general I/O pin. When RXEN is set, the UART Receiver will be connected to PD0 (UART0) or PB2 (UART1),  
which is forced to be an input pin regardless of the setting of the DDD0 in DDRD (UART0) or DDB2 bit in DDRB (UART1).  
When PD0 (UART0) or PB2 (UART1) is forced to input by the UART, the PORTD0 (UART0) or PORTB2 (UART1) bit can  
still be used to control the pull-up resistor on the pin.  
Note that PB2 (UART1) also is used as one of the input pins to the Analog Comparator. It is therefor not recommended to  
use UART1 if the Analog Comparator also is used in the application at the same time.  
When the CHR9n bit in the UCSRnB register is set, transmitted and received characters are 9-bit long plus start and stop  
bits. The 9th data bit to be transmitted is the TXB8n bit in UCSRnB register. This bit must be set to the wanted value before  
a transmission is initiated by writing to the UDRn register. The 9th data bit received is the RXB8n bit in the UCSRnB  
register.  
Multi-processor Communication Mode  
The Multi-processor Communication Mode enables several slave MCUs to receive data from a master MCU. This is done  
by first decoding an address byte to find out which MCU has been addressed. If a particular slave MCU has been  
addressed, it will receive the following data bytes as normal, while the other slave MCUs will ignore the data bytes until  
another address byte is received.  
For an MCU to act as a master MCU, it should enter 9-bit transmission mode (CHR9n in UCSRnB set). The 9th bit must be  
one to indicate that an address byte is being transmitted, and zero to indicate that a data byte is being transmitted.  
For the slave MCUs, the mechanism appears slightly differently for 8-bit and 9-bit reception mode. In 8-bit reception mode  
(CHR9n in UCSRnB cleared), the stop bit is one for an address byte and zero for a data byte. In 9-bit reception mode  
(CHR9n in UCSRnB set), the 9th bit is one for an address byte and zero for a data byte, whereas the stop bit is always  
high.  
The following procedure should be used to exchange data in Multi-processor Communication Mode:  
1. All slave MCUs are in Multi-processor Communication Mode (MPCMn in UCSRnA is set).  
2. The master MCU sends an address byte, and all slaves receive and read this byte. In the slave MCUs, the RXCn  
flag in UCSRnA will be set as normal.  
3. Each slave MCU reads the UDRn register and determines if it has been selected. If so, it clears the MPCMn bit in  
UCSRnA, otherwise it waits for the next address byte.  
63  
4. For each received data byte, the receiving MCU will set the receive complete flag (RXCn in UCSRnA. In 8-bit mode,  
the receiving MCU will also generate a framing error (FEn in UCSRnA set), since the stop bit is zero. The other  
slave MCUs, which still have the MPCMn bit set, will ignore the data byte. In this case, the UDRn register and the  
RXCn, FEn, or flags will not be affected.  
5. After the last byte has been transferred, the process repeats from step 2.  
UART Control  
UART0 I/O Data Register UDR0  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$0C ($2C)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
UDR0  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
UART1 I/O Data Register UDR1  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$03 ($23)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
UDR1  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The UDRn register is actually two physically separate registers sharing the same I/O address. When writing to the register,  
the UART Transmit Data register is written. When reading from UDRn, the UART Receive Data register is read.  
UART0 Control and Status Registers UCSR0A  
Bit  
7
RXC0  
R
6
TXC0  
R/W  
0
5
4
FE0  
R
3
OR0  
R
2
-
1
U2X0  
R/W  
0
0
MPCM0  
R/W  
0
$0B ($2B)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
UDRE0  
UCSR0A  
R
1
R
0
0
0
0
UART1 Control and Status Registers UCSR1A  
Bit  
7
RXC1  
R
6
TXC1  
R/W  
0
5
4
FE1  
R
3
OR1  
R
2
-
1
U2X1  
R/W  
0
0
MPCM1  
R/W  
0
$02 ($22)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
UDRE1  
UCSR1A  
R
1
R
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 - RXC0/RXC1: UART Receive Complete  
This bit is set (one) when a received character is transferred from the Receiver Shift register to UDRn. The bit is set regard-  
less of any detected framing errors. When the RXCIEn bit in UCSRnB is set, the UART Receive Complete interrupt will be  
executed when RXCn is set(one). RXCn is cleared by reading UDRn. When interrupt-driven data reception is used, the  
UART Receive Complete Interrupt routine must read UDRn in order to clear RXCn, otherwise a new interrupt will occur  
once the interrupt routine terminates.  
Bit 6 - TXC0/TXC1: UART Transmit Complete  
This bit is set (one) when the entire character (including the stop bit) in the Transmit Shift register has been shifted out and  
no new data has been written to UDRn. This flag is especially useful in half-duplex communications interfaces, where a  
transmitting application must enter receive mode and free the communications bus immediately after completing the  
transmission.  
When the TXCIEn bit in UCSRnB is set, setting of TXCn causes the UART Transmit Complete interrupt to be executed.  
TXCn is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, the TXCn bit is  
cleared (zero) by writing a logical one to the bit.  
ATmega161(L)  
64  
 
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Bit 5 - UDRE0/UDRE1: UART Data Register Empty  
This bit is set (one) when a character written to UDRn is transferred to the Transmit shift register. Setting of this bit indi-  
cates that the transmitter is ready to receive a new character for transmission.  
When the UDRIEn bit in UCSRnB is set, the UART Transmit Complete interrupt will be executed as long as UDREn is set  
and the global interrupt enable bit in SREG is set. UDREn is cleared by writing UDRn. When interrupt-driven data transmit-  
tal is used, the UART Data Register Empty Interrupt routine must write UDRn in order to clear UDREn, otherwise a new  
interrupt will occur once the interrupt routine terminates.  
UDREn is set (one) during reset to indicate that the transmitter is ready.  
Bit 4 - FE0/FE1: Framing Error  
This bit is set if a Framing Error condition is detected, i.e. when the stop bit of an incoming character is zero.  
The FEn bit is cleared when the stop bit of received data is one.  
Bit 3 - OR0/OR1: OverRun  
This bit is set if an Overrun condition is detected, i.e. when a character already present in the UDRn register is not read  
before the next character has been shifted into the Receiver Shift register. The ORn bit is buffered, which means that it will  
be set once the valid data still in UDRn is read.  
The ORn bit is cleared (zero) when data is received and transferred to UDRn.  
Bit 2 - Res: Reserved bit  
This bit is reserved bit in the ATmega161 and will always read as zero.  
Bits 1 - U2X0/U2X1: Double the UART transmission speed  
When this bit is set (one) the UART speed will be doubled. This means that a bit will be transmitted/received in 8 CPU clock  
periods instead of 16 CPU clock periods. For a detailed description, see Double Speed Transmissionon page 68.  
Bit 0 - MPCM0/MPCM1: Multi-processor Communication Mode  
This bit is used to enter Multi-processor Communication Mode. The bit is set when the slave MCU waits for an address byte  
to be received. When the MCU has been addressed, the MCU switches off the MPCMn bit, and starts data reception.  
For a detailed description, see Multi-processor Communication Mode.  
UART0 Control and Status Registers UCSR0B  
Bit  
7
RXCIE0  
R/W  
0
6
TXCIE0  
R/W  
0
5
UDRIE0  
R/W  
0
4
RXEN0  
R/W  
0
3
TXEN0  
R/W  
0
2
CHR90  
R/W  
0
1
0
TXB80  
R/W  
0
$0A ($2A)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
RXB80  
UCSR0B  
R
1
UART1 Control and Status Registers UCSR1B  
Bit  
7
RXCIE1  
R/W  
0
6
TXCIE1  
R/W  
0
5
UDRIE1  
R/W  
0
4
RXEN1  
R/W  
0
3
TXEN1  
R/W  
0
2
CHR91  
R/W  
0
1
0
TXB81  
R/W  
0
$01 ($21)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
RXB81  
UCSR1B  
R
1
Bit 7 - RXCIE0/RXCIE1: RX Complete Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is set (one), a setting of the RXCn bit in UCSRnA will cause the Receive Complete interrupt routine to be  
executed provided that global interrupts are enabled.  
Bit 6 - TXCIE0/TXCIE1: TX Complete Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is set (one), a setting of the TXCn bit in UCSRnA will cause the Transmit Complete interrupt routine to be  
executed provided that global interrupts are enabled.  
Bit 5 - UDRIE0/UDREI1: UART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is set (one), a setting of the UDREn bit in UCSRnA will cause the UART Data Register Empty interrupt routine  
to be executed provided that global interrupts are enabled.  
Bit 4 - RXEN0/RXEN1: Receiver Enable  
This bit enables the UART receiver when set (one). When the receiver is disabled, the TXCn, ORn and FEn status flags  
cannot become set. If these flags are set, turning off RXEN does not cause them to be cleared.  
65  
 
 
Bit 3 - TXEN0/TXEN1: Transmitter Enable  
This bit enables the UART transmitter when set (one). When disabling the transmitter while transmitting a character, the  
transmitter is not disabled before the character in the shift register plus any following character in UDRn has been com-  
pletely transmitted.  
Bit 2 - CHR90/CHR91: 9 Bit Characters  
When this bit is set (one) transmitted and received characters are 9 bit long plus start and stop bits. The 9th bit is read and  
written by using the RXB8n and TXB8 bits in UCSRnB, respectively. The 9th data bit can be used as an extra stop bit or a  
parity bit.  
Bit 1 - RXB80/RXB81: Receive Data Bit 8  
When CHR9n is set (one), RXB8n is the 9th data bit of the received character.  
Bit 0 - TXB80/TXB81: Transmit Data Bit 8  
When CHR9n is set (one), TXB8n is the 9th data bit in the character to be transmitted.  
Baud Rate Generator  
The baud rate generator is a frequency divider which generates baud-rates according to the following equation:  
fCK  
BAUD = ---------------------------------  
16(UBR + 1)  
BAUD = Baud-rate  
fCK= Crystal Clock frequency  
UBR = Contents of the UBRRH and UBRR registers, (0-4095)  
Note that this equation is not valid when the UART transmission speed is doubled. See Double Speed Transmissionon  
page 68 for a detailed description.  
For standard crystal frequencies, the most commonly used baud rates can be generated by using the UBR settings in  
Table 23. UBR values which yield an actual baud rate differing less than 2% from the target baud rate, are bold in the table.  
However, using baud rates that have more than 1% error is not recommended. High error ratings give less noise  
resistance.  
ATmega161(L)  
66  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 23. UBR Settings at Various Crystal Frequencies  
B a u d R a te  
2 4 0 0  
% E rro r  
0 .2  
% E rro r  
0 .0  
% E rro r  
5 1 0 .2  
1 M H z  
1 .8 4 3 2 M H z  
2 M H z  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
2 5  
1 2  
6
3
2
1
1
0
0
4 7  
2 3  
1 1  
7
4 8 0 0  
9 6 0 0  
0 .2  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
3 3 .3 U B R =  
2 5  
1 2  
8
0 .2  
0 .2  
3 .7  
7 .5 U B R =  
7 .8 U B R =  
7 .8 U B R =  
7 .8 U B R =  
2 2 .9 U B R =  
7 .8 U B R =  
2 2 .9 U B R =  
8 4 .3 U B R =  
1 4 4 0 0  
1 9 2 0 0  
2 8 8 0 0  
3 8 4 0 0  
5 7 6 0 0  
7 6 8 0 0  
1 1 5 2 0 0  
6
7 .5  
5
3
2
1
1
0
3
7 .8  
2
7 .8  
1
7 .8  
1
0
2 2 .9  
7 .8  
0
U B R =  
0 .0  
B a u d R a te  
2 4 0 0  
% E rro r  
% E rro r  
0 .0  
% E rro r  
0 .2  
3 .2 7 6 8 M H z  
3 .6 8 6 4 M H z  
4 M H z  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
8 4  
4 2  
2 0  
1 3  
1 0  
6
4
3
2
1
0 .4  
0 .8  
1 .6  
1 .6  
9 5  
4 7  
2 3  
1 5  
1 1  
7
1 0 3  
5 1  
2 5  
1 6  
1 2  
8
4 8 0 0  
9 6 0 0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .2  
0 .2  
2 .1  
0 .2  
3 .7  
7 .5  
7 .8  
7 .8  
1 4 4 0 0  
1 9 2 0 0  
2 8 8 0 0  
3 8 4 0 0  
5 7 6 0 0  
7 6 8 0 0  
1 1 5 2 0 0  
3 .1 U B R =  
U B R =  
1 .6  
6 .3 U B R =  
1 2 .5 U B R =  
1 2 .5 U B R =  
1 2 .5 U B R =  
6
3
2
1
5
3
2
1
7 .8  
0 .0  
B a u d R a te  
2 4 0 0  
% E rro r  
% E rro r  
U B R =  
0 .2  
% E rro r  
0 .0  
7 .3 7 2 8 M H z  
8 M H z  
9 .2 1 6 M H z  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
1 9 1  
9 5  
4 7  
3 1  
2 3  
1 5  
1 1  
7
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
2 0 7  
1 0 3  
5 1  
3 4  
2 5  
1 6  
1 2  
8
2 3 9  
1 1 9  
5 9  
3 9  
2 9  
1 9  
1 4  
9
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
U B R =  
4 8 0 0  
9 6 0 0  
0 .2  
0 .2  
0 .8  
0 .2  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
0 .0  
6 .7  
1 4 4 0 0  
1 9 2 0 0  
2 8 8 0 0  
3 8 4 0 0  
5 7 6 0 0  
7 6 8 0 0  
1 1 5 2 0 0  
2 .1 U B R =  
U B R =  
0 .2  
3 .7 U B R =  
7 .5 U B R =  
7 .8 U B R =  
6
3
7
4
5
3
0 .0  
UART0 and UART1 High byte Baud Rate Register UBRRHI  
Bit  
7
MSB1  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
LSB1  
R/W  
0
3
MSB0  
R/W  
0
2
1
0
LSB0  
R/W  
0
$20 ($40)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
UBRRHI  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The UART baud register is a 12-bit register. The 4 most significant bits are located in a separate register, UBRRHI. Note  
that both UART0 and UART1 share this register. Bit 7 to bit 4 of UBRRHI contain the 4 most significant bits of the UART1  
baud register. Bit3 to Bit0 contain the 4 most significant bits of the UART0 baud register.  
67  
 
 
UART0 Baud Rate Register Low byte UBRR0  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$09 ($29)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
UBRR0  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
UART1 Baud Rate Register Low byte UBRR1  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$00 ($20)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
UBRR1  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
UBRRn stores the 8 least significant bits of the UART baud rate register.  
Double Speed Transmission  
The ATmega161 provides a separate UART mode that allows the user to double the communication speed. By setting the  
U2X bit in UART Control and Status Register UCSRnA, the UART speed will be doubled. The data reception will differ  
slightly from normal mode. Since the speed is doubled, the receiver front-end logic samples the signals on RXDn pin at a  
frequency 8 times the baud rate. While the line is idle, one single sample of logical zero will be interpreted as the falling  
edge of a start bit, and the start bit detection sequence is initiated. Let sample 1 denote the first zero-sample. Following the  
1 to 0-transition, the receiver samples the RXDn pin at samples 4, 5 and 6. If two or more of these three samples are found  
to be logical ones, the start bit is rejected as a noise spike and the receiver starts looking for the next 1 to 0-transition.  
If however, a valid start bit is detected, sampling of the data bits following the start bit is performed. These bits are also  
sampled at samples 4, 5 and 6. The logical value found in at least two of the three samples is taken as the bit value. All bits  
are shifted into the transmitter shift register as they are sampled. Sampling of an incoming character is shown in Figure 48.  
Figure 48. Sampling Received Data when the transmission speed is doubled  
RXD  
START BIT  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
STOP BIT  
RECEIVER  
SAMPLING  
The Baud Rate Generator in double UART speed mode  
Note that the baud-rate equation is different from the equation at page 66 when the UART speed is doubled:  
fCK  
BAUD = -----------------------------  
8(UBR + 1)  
BAUD = Baud-rate  
fCK= Crystal Clock frequency  
UBR = Contents of the UBRRHI and UBRR registers, (0-4095)  
Note that this equation is only valid when the UART transmission speed is doubled.  
For standard crystal frequencies, the most commonly used baud rates can be generated by using the UBR settings in  
Table 23. UBR values which yield an actual baud rate differing less than 1.5% from the target baud rate, are bold in the  
table. However since the number of samples are reduced and the system clock might have some variance (this applies  
especially when using resonators), it is recommended that the baud rate error is less than 0.5%.  
ATmega161(L)  
68  
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 24. UBR Settings at Various Crystal Frequencies in Double Speed Mode  
Baud Rate  
1.0000 MHz  
% Error  
1.8432 MHz  
% Error  
2.0000 MHz  
% Error  
2400  
UBR = 51  
UBR = 25  
UBR = 12  
UBR = 8  
UBR = 6  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 2  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
-
0.2  
0.2  
0.2  
3.7  
7.5  
7.8  
7.8  
7.8  
22.9  
84.3  
-
UBR = 95  
UBR = 47  
UBR = 23  
UBR = 15  
UBR = 11  
UBR = 7  
UBR = 5  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 2  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
UBR = 103  
UBR = 51  
UBR = 25  
UBR = 16  
UBR = 12  
UBR = 8  
UBR = 6  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 2  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
0.2  
0.2  
0.2  
2.1  
0.2  
3.7  
7.5  
7.8  
7.8  
7.8  
84.3  
4800  
9600  
14400  
19200  
28800  
38400  
57600  
76800  
115200  
230400  
Baud Rate  
3.2768 MHz  
% Error  
3.6864 MHz  
% Error  
4.0000 MHz  
% Error  
2400  
UBR = 170  
UBR = 84  
UBR = 42  
UBR = 27  
UBR = 20  
UBR = 13  
UBR = 10  
UBR = 6  
UBR = 4  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
-
0.2  
0.4  
0.8  
1.6  
1.6  
1.6  
3.1  
1.6  
6.2  
12.5  
12.5  
12.5  
-
UBR = 191  
UBR = 95  
UBR = 47  
UBR = 31  
UBR = 23  
UBR = 15  
UBR = 11  
UBR = 7  
UBR = 5  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
-
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
-
UBR = 207  
UBR = 103  
UBR = 51  
UBR = 34  
UBR = 25  
UBR = 16  
UBR = 12  
UBR = 8  
0.2  
0.2  
0.2  
0.8  
0.2  
2.1  
0.2  
3.7  
7.5  
7.8  
7.8  
7.8  
84.3  
4800  
9600  
14400  
19200  
28800  
38400  
57600  
76800  
115200  
230400  
460800  
912600  
UBR = 6  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
UBR = 0  
Baud Rate  
7.3728 MHz  
% Error  
8.0000 MHz  
% Error  
9.2160 MHz  
% Error  
2400  
UBR = 383  
UBR = 191  
UBR = 95  
UBR = 63  
UBR = 47  
UBR = 31  
UBR = 23  
UBR = 15  
UBR = 11  
UBR = 7  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
UBR = 416  
UBR = 207  
UBR = 103  
UBR = 68  
UBR = 51  
UBR = 34  
UBR = 25  
UBR = 16  
UBR = 12  
UBR = 8  
0.1  
0.2  
0.2  
0.6  
0.2  
0.8  
0.2  
2.1  
0.2  
3.7  
7.8  
7.8  
7.8  
UBR = 479  
UBR = 239  
UBR = 119  
UBR = 79  
UBR = 59  
UBR = 39  
UBR = 29  
UBR = 19  
UBR = 14  
UBR = 9  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
20.0  
20.0  
4800  
9600  
14400  
19200  
28800  
38400  
57600  
76800  
115200  
230400  
460800  
912600  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 4  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 2  
UBR = 0  
UBR = 0  
UBR = 0  
69  
Analog Comparator  
The analog comparator compares the input values on the positive input PB2 (AIN0) and negative input PB3 (AIN1). When  
the voltage on the positive input PB2 (AIN0) is higher than the voltage on the negative input PB3 (AIN1), the Analog Com-  
parator Output, ACO is set (one). The comparators output can be set to trigger the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture function.  
In addition, the comparator can trigger a separate interrupt, exclusive to the Analog Comparator. The user can select Inter-  
rupt triggering on comparator output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its surrounding logic is  
shown in Figure 49.  
Figure 49. Analog Comparator Block Diagram  
Analog Comparator Control And Status Register ACSR  
Bit  
7
6
5
ACO  
R
4
ACI  
R/W  
0
3
ACIE  
R/W  
0
2
ACIC  
R/W  
0
1
ACIS1  
R/W  
0
0
ACIS0  
R/W  
0
$08 ($28)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
ACD  
R/W  
0
AINBG  
ACSR  
R
0
0
Bit 7 - ACD: Analog Comparator Disable  
When this bit is set(one), the power to the analog comparator is switched off. This bit can be set at any time to turn off the  
analog comparator. This will reduce power consumption in active and idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the Analog  
Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bit is  
changed.  
Bit 6 - AINBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select  
When this bit is set, a fixed bandgap voltage of 1.22 ± 0.05V replaces the normal input to the positive input (AIN0) of the  
comparator. When this bit is cleared, the normal input pin PB2 is applied to the positive input of the comparator.  
Bit 5 - ACO: Analog Comparator Output  
ACO is directly connected to the comparator output.  
Bit 4 - ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set (one) when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined by ACI1 and ACI0. The Analog  
Comparator Interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit is set (one) and the I-bit in SREG is set (one). ACI is cleared by  
hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing a logic one to  
the flag.  
ATmega161(L)  
70  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Bit 3 - ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable  
When the ACIE bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the analog comparator interrupt is enabled.  
When cleared (zero), the interrupt is disabled.  
Bit 2 - ACIC: Analog Comparator Input Capture Enable  
When set (one), this bit enables the Input Capture function in Timer/Counter1 to be triggered by the analog comparator.  
The comparator output is in this case directly connected to the Input Capture front-end logic, making the comparator utilize  
the noise canceler and edge select features of the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt. When cleared (zero), no con-  
nection between the analog comparator and the Input Capture function is given. To make the comparator trigger the  
Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt, the TICIE1 bit in the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK) must be set (one).  
Bits 1,0 - ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select  
These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the Analog Comparator interrupt. The different settings are  
shown in Table 25.  
Table 25. ACIS1/ACIS0 Settings  
ACIS1  
ACIS0  
Interrupt Mode  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Comparator Interrupt on Output Toggle  
Reserved  
Comparator Interrupt on Falling Output Edge  
Comparator Interrupt on Rising Output Edge  
Note:  
When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, The Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in  
the ACSR register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed.  
Caution: Using the SBI or CBI instruction on other bits than ACI in this register, will write a one back into ACI if it is read as  
set, thus clearing the flag.  
The Analog Comparator pins (PB2 and PB3) are also used as the TXD1 and RXD1 pins for UART1. Note that if the UART1  
transceiver or receiver is enabled, the UART1 will override the settings in the DDRB register even if the Analog Comparator  
is enabled. Therefore it is not recommended to use UART1 if the Analog Comparator is needed in the same application at  
the same time. See UARTson page 60 for more details.  
Internal Voltage reference  
ATmega161 features an internal voltage reference with a nominal voltage of 1.22V. This reference is used for Brown-out  
Detection, and it can be used as an input to the Analog Comparator.  
Voltage Reference Enable Signals and Start-up Time  
The voltage reference has a start-up time that may influence on the way it should be used. The maximum start-up time is  
TBD. To save power, the reference is on during the following situations only:  
1. When BOD is enabled (by programming the BODEN fuse).  
2. When the bandgap reference is connected to the Analog Comparator (by setting the AINBG bit in ACSR).  
Thus, when BOD is not enabled, after setting the AINBG bit, the user must always allow the reference to start up before the  
output from the Analog Comparator is used. The bandgap reference uses approx. 10 µA, and to reduce the power con-  
sumption in power-down mode, the user can turn off the reference when entering this mode.  
71  
 
Interface to external memory  
With all the features the external memory interface provides, it is well suited to operate as an interface to memory devices  
such as external SRAM and FLASH, and peripherals as LCD-display, A/D, D/A etc. The control bits for the external mem-  
ory interface are located in two registers, the MCU Control Register MCUCR and the Extended MCU Control Register –  
EMCUCR.  
MCU Control Register MCUCR  
Bit  
7
6
SRW10  
R/W  
0
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
ISC11  
R/W  
0
2
ISC10  
R/W  
0
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
$35 ($55)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
SRE  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
Extended MCU Control Register EMCUCR  
Bit  
7
6
SRL2  
R/W  
0
5
SRL1  
R/W  
0
4
SRL0  
R/W  
0
3
SRW01  
R/W  
0
2
SRW00  
R/W  
0
1
SRW11  
R/W  
0
0
ISC20  
R/W  
0
$36 ($56)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
SM0  
R/W  
0
EMCUCR  
Bit 7 MCUCR SRE: External SRAM enable  
When the SRE bit is set (one), the external memory interface is enabled, and the pin functions AD0-7 (Port A), A8-15 (Port  
C), ALE (Port E), WR and RD (Port D) are activated as the alternate pin functions. The SRE bit overrides any pin direction  
settings in the respective data direction registers. See Figure 51 Figure 54 for description of the external memory pin  
functions. When the SRE bit is cleared (zero), the external data memory interface is disabled, and the normal pin and data  
direction settings are used  
Bit 6..4 EMCUCR SRL2, SRL1, SRL0: Wait state page limit  
It is possible to configure different wait-states for different external memory addresses. The external memory address  
space can be divided in two pages with different wait-state bits. The SRL2, SRL1 and SRL0 bits select the split of the  
pages, see Table 27 and Figure 50. As default the SRL2, SRL1 and SRL0 bits are set to zero and the entire external mem-  
ory address space is treated as one page. When the entire SRAM address space is configured as one page, the wait-  
states are configured by the SRW11 and SRW10 bits.  
Bit 1 EMCUCR and Bit 6 MCUCR SRW11, SRW10: Wait state select bits for upper page  
The SRW11 and SRW10 bits control the number of wait-states for the upper page of the external memory address space,  
see Table 26. Note that if the SRL2, SRL1 and SRL0 bits are set to zero, the SRW11 and SRW10 bit settings will define the  
wait-state of the entire SRAM address space.  
Bit 3..2 EMCUCR SRW01, SRW00: Wait state select bits for lower page  
The SRW01 and SRW00 bits control the number of wait-states for the lower page of the external memory address space,  
see Table 26.  
Table 26. Wait-states  
SRWn1  
SRWn0  
Wait-states  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No wait states  
Wait one cycle during read/write strobe  
Wait two cycles during read/write strobe  
Wait two cycles during read/write and wait one cycle before driving out new address  
Note:  
n = 0 or 1 (lower/upper page).  
For further details of the timing and wait-states of the external memory interface, see Figure 51 Figure 54 how the setting  
of the SRW bits affects the timing.  
ATmega161(L)  
72  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 27. Page limits with different settings of SRL2..0  
SRL2  
SRL1  
SRL0  
Page Limits  
Lower page = N/A  
0
0
0
Upper page = $0460-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$1FFF  
Upper page = $2000-$FFFF  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Lower page = $0460-$4FFF  
Upper page = $4000-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$5FFF  
Upper page = $6000-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$7FFF  
Upper page = $8000-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$9FFF  
Upper page = $A000-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$BFFF  
Upper page = $C000-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$DFFF  
Upper page = $E000-$FFFF  
73  
Figure 50. External memory with page select  
Data Memory  
$0000  
$0460  
Internal memory  
Lower page  
SRW01  
SRW00  
SRL[2..0]  
External Memory  
(0-63K x 8)  
Upper page  
SRW11  
SRW10  
$FFFF  
Figure 51. External Data Memory Cycles without Wait State (SRWn1 = 0 and SRWn0 =0)  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
Address [15..8]  
Data / Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
Prev. data  
Address  
Address  
Data  
Prev. data  
XX  
Data / Address [7..0]  
RD  
XX  
Note:  
SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper page) or SRW01 (lower page), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper page) or SRW00 (lower page)  
The ALE pulse in period T4 is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). The Data and  
Address will only change in T4 if ALE is present (the next instruction accesses the RAM).  
ATmega161(L)  
74  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 52. External Data Memory Cycles with SRWn1 = 0 and SRWn0 = 1  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T5  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
Address [15..8]  
Data / Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
Prev. data  
Address  
Address  
Data  
Prev. data  
XX  
Data / Address [7..0]  
RD  
XX  
Note:  
SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper page) or SRW01 (lower page), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper page) or SRW00 (lower page)  
The ALE pulse in period T5 is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). The Data and  
Address will only change in T5 if ALE is present (the next instruction accesses the RAM).  
Figure 53. External Data Memory Cycles with SRWn1 = 1 and SRWn0 = 0  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T6  
T5  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
Address [15..8]  
Data / Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
Prev. data  
Address  
Address  
Data  
Prev. data  
XX  
Data / Address [7..0]  
RD  
XX  
Note:  
SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper page) or SRW01 (lower page), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper page) or SRW00 (lower page)  
The ALE pulse in period T6 is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). The Data and  
Address will only change in T6 if ALE is present (the next instruction accesses the RAM).  
Figure 54. External Data Memory Cycles with SRWn1 = 1 and SRWn0 = 1  
T6  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T7  
T5  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
Address [15..8]  
Data / Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
Prev. data  
Address  
Address  
Data  
Prev. data  
XX  
Data / Address [7..0]  
RD  
XX  
Note:  
SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper page) or SRW01 (lower page), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper page) or SRW00 (lower page)  
The ALE pulse in period T7 is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). The Data and  
Address will only change in T7 if ALE is present (the next instruction accesses the RAM).  
75  
Using the External Memory Interface  
The interface consists of:  
Port A: Multiplexed low-order address bus and data bus  
Port C: High-order address bus  
The ALE-pin: Address latch enable  
The RD and WR-pin: Read and write strobes.  
The external memory interface is enabled by setting the SRE External SRAM enable bit of the MCUCR MCU control  
register, and will over-ride the setting of the data direction register DDRA, DDRD and DDRE. When the SRE bit is cleared  
(zero), the external memory interface is disabled, and the normal pin and data direction settings are used. When SRE is  
low, the address space above the internal SRAM boundary is not mapped into the internal SRAM, as in AVR parts not hav-  
ing external memory interface.  
When ALE goes from high to low, there is a valid address on Port A. ALE is low during a data transfer. RD and WR are  
active when accessing the external memory only.  
When the external memory interface is enabled, the ALE signal may have short pulses when accessing the internal RAM,  
but the ALE signal is stable when accessing the external memory.  
Figure 55 sketches how to connect an external SRAM to the AVR using 8 latches which are transparent when G is high.  
Figure 55. External SRAM connected to the AVR  
D[7:0]  
Port A  
ALE  
D
G
Q
A[7:0]  
SRAM  
A[15:8]  
AVR  
Port C  
RD  
RD  
WR  
WR  
For details in the timing for the SRAM interface, please refer to Figure 84 Figure 87 and Table 49 Table 56.  
I/O-Ports  
All AVR ports have true Read-modify-write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports. This means that the direc-  
tion of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing the direction of any other pin with the SBI and CBI  
instructions. The same applies for changing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/disabling of pull-up resistors (if  
configured as input).  
Port A  
Port A is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port.  
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for the Port A, one each for the Data Register PORTA, $1B($3B), Data  
Direction Register DDRA, $1A($3A) and the Port A Input Pins PINA, $19($39). The Port A Input Pins address is read  
only, while the Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
All port pins have individually selectable pull-up resistors. The Port A output buffers can sink 20 mA and thus drive LED dis-  
plays directly. When pins PA0 to PA7 are used as inputs and are externally pulled low, they will source current if the  
internal pull-up resistors are activated.  
ATmega161(L)  
76  
 
ATmega161(L)  
The Port A pins have alternate functions related to the optional external memory interface. Port A can be configured to be  
the multiplexed low-order address/data bus during accesses to the external data memory. In this mode, Port A has internal  
pull-up resistors.  
When Port A is set to the alternate function by the SRE External SRAM Enable bit in the MCUCR MCU Control Regis-  
ter, the alternate settings override the data direction register.  
Port A Data Register PORTA  
Bit  
7
PORTA7  
R/W  
6
PORTA6  
R/W  
5
PORTA5  
R/W  
4
PORTA4  
R/W  
3
PORTA3  
R/W  
2
PORTA2  
R/W  
1
PORTA1  
R/W  
0
PORTA0  
R/W  
$1B ($3B)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
PORTA  
DDRA  
PINA  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port A Data Direction Register DDRA  
Bit  
7
DDA7  
R/W  
0
6
DDA6  
R/W  
0
5
DDA5  
R/W  
0
4
DDA4  
R/W  
0
3
DDA3  
R/W  
0
2
DDA2  
R/W  
0
1
DDA1  
R/W  
0
0
DDA0  
R/W  
0
$1A ($3A)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
Port A Input Pins Address PINA  
Bit  
7
PINA7  
R
6
PINA6  
R
5
PINA5  
R
4
PINA4  
R
3
PINA3  
R
2
PINA2  
R
1
PINA1  
R
0
PINA0  
R
$19 ($39)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
The Port A Input Pins address PINA is not a register, and this address enables access to the physical value on each  
Port A pin. When reading PORTA the Port A Data Latch is read, and when reading PINA, the logical values present on the  
pins are read.  
Port A as General Digital I/O  
All 8 pins in Port A have equal functionality when used as digital I/O pins.  
PAn, General I/O pin: The DDAn bit in the DDRA register selects the direction of this pin, if DDAn is set (one), PAn is con-  
figured as an output pin. If DDAn is cleared (zero), PAn is configured as an input pin. If PORTAn is set (one) when the pin  
configured as an input pin, the MOS pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, the PORTAn has to be  
cleared (zero) or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The Port A pins are tri-stated when a reset condition  
becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Table 28. DDAn Effects on Port A Pins  
DDAn  
PORTAn  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
No  
PAn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Push-pull Zero Output  
Push-pull One Output  
Output  
Output  
No  
n: 7,60, pin number.  
Port A Schematics  
Note that all port pins are synchronized. The synchronization latch is however, not shown in the figure.  
77  
 
 
 
Figure 56. Port A Schematic Diagrams (Pins PA0 - PA7)  
Port B  
Port B is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port.  
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for the Port B, one each for the Data Register PORTB, $18($38), Data  
Direction Register DDRB, $17($37) and the Port B Input Pins PINB, $16($36). The Port B Input Pins address is read  
only, while the Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
All port pins have individually selectable pull-up resistors. The Port B output buffers can sink 20 mA and thus drive LED dis-  
plays directly. When pins PB0 to PB7 are used as inputs and are externally pulled low, they will source current if the  
internal pull-up resistors are activated.  
The Port B pins with alternate functions are shown in the following table:  
Table 29. Port B Pins Alternate Functions  
Port Pin  
PB0  
Alternate Functions  
OC0 (Timer/Counter 0 Compare match Output) /T0 (Timer/Counter 0 external counter input)  
OC2 (Timer/Counter 2 Compare match Output) /T1 (Timer/Counter 1 external counter input)  
RXD1 (UART1 input line) /AIN0 (Analog comparator positive input)  
TXD1 (UART1 output line) /AIN1 (Analog comparator negative input)  
SS (SPI Slave Select input)  
PB1  
PB2  
PB3  
PB4  
PB5  
MOSI (SPI Bus Master Output/Slave Input)  
PB6  
MISO (SPI Bus Master Input/Slave Output)  
PB7  
SCK (SPI Bus Serial Clock)  
ATmega161(L)  
78  
ATmega161(L)  
When the pins are used for the alternate function the DDRB and PORTB register has to be set according to the alternate  
function description.  
Port B Data Register PORTB  
Bit  
7
PORTB7  
R/W  
6
PORTB6  
R/W  
5
PORTB5  
R/W  
4
PORTB4  
R/W  
3
PORTB3  
R/W  
2
PORTB2  
R/W  
1
PORTB1  
R/W  
0
PORTB0  
R/W  
$18 ($38)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PINB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port B Data Direction Register DDRB  
Bit  
7
DDB7  
R/W  
0
6
DDB6  
R/W  
0
5
DDB5  
R/W  
0
4
DDB4  
R/W  
0
3
DDB3  
R/W  
0
2
DDB2  
R/W  
0
1
DDB1  
R/W  
0
0
DDB0  
R/W  
0
$17 ($37)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
Port B Input Pins Address PINB  
Bit  
7
PINB7  
R
6
PINB6  
R
5
PINB5  
R
4
PINB4  
R
3
PINB3  
R
2
PINB2  
R
1
PINB1  
R
0
PINB0  
R
$16 ($36)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
The Port B Input Pins address PINB is not a register, and this address enables access to the physical value on each  
Port B pin. When reading PORTB, the Port B Data Latch is read, and when reading PINB, the logical values present on the  
pins are read.  
Port B as General Digital I/O  
All 8 pins in Port B have equal functionality when used as digital I/O pins.  
PBn, General I/O pin: The DDBn bit in the DDRB register selects the direction of this pin, if DDBn is set (one), PBn is con-  
figured as an output pin. If DDBn is cleared (zero), PBn is configured as an input pin. If PORTBn is set (one) when the pin  
configured as an input pin, the MOS pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, the PORTBn has to be  
cleared (zero) or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition  
becomes active, even if the clock is not running  
Table 30. DDBn Effects on Port B Pins  
DDBn  
PORTBn  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
No  
PBn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Push-pull Zero Output  
Push-pull One Output  
Output  
Output  
No  
n: 7,60, pin number.  
79  
 
 
 
Alternate functions of Port B  
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:  
SCK - Port B, Bit 7  
SCK: Master clock output, slave clock input pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured  
as an input regardless of the setting of DDB7. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is con-  
trolled by DDB7. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB7 bit. See the  
description of the SPI port for further details.  
MISO - Port B, Bit 6  
MISO: Master data input, slave data output pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a master, this pin is configured  
as an input regardless of the setting of DDB6. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, the data direction of this pin is controlled  
by DDB6. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB6 bit. See the description of  
the SPI port for further details.  
MOSI - Port B, Bit 5  
MOSI: SPI Master data output, slave data input for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured  
as an input regardless of the setting of DDB5. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is con-  
trolled by DDB5. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB5 bit. See the  
description of the SPI port for further details.  
SS - Port B, Bit 4  
SS: Slave port select input. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting  
of DDB5. As a slave, the SPI is activated when this pin is driven low. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direc-  
tion of this pin is controlled by DDB5. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the  
PORTB5 bit. See the description of the SPI port for further details.  
TXD1/AIN1 - Port B, Bit 3  
AIN1, Analog Comparator Negative Input. This pin also serves as the negative input of the on-chip analog comparator.  
TXD1, Transmit Data (Data output pin for the UART1). When the UART1 transmitter is enabled, this pin is configured as an  
output regardless of the value of DDRB3.  
RXD1/AIN0 - Port B, Bit 2  
AIN0, Analog Comparator Positive Input. This pin also serves as the positive input of the on-chip analog comparator.  
RXD1, receive Data (Data input pin for the UART1). When the UART1 receiver is enabled this pin is configured as an input  
regardless of the value of DDRB2. When the UART1 forces this pin to be an input, a logical one in PORTB2 will turn on the  
internal pull-up.  
OC2/T1 - Port B, Bit 1  
T1, Timer/Counter1 counter source. See the Timer/Counter1.on page 45 for further details.  
OC2, Output compare match output: The PB1 pin can serve as an external output when the Timer/Counter2 compare  
matches. The PB1 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB1 set (one)) to serve this function. See 8-bit Tim-  
ers/Counters T/C0 and T/C2on page 37 for further details. The OC2 pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer  
function.  
OC0/T0 - Port B, Bit 0  
T0: Timer/Counter0 counter source. See the 8-bit Timers/Counters T/C0 and T/C2on page 37 further details.  
OC0, Output compare match output: The PB0 pin can serve as an external output when the Timer/Counter0 compare  
matches. The PB0 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB0 set (one)) to serve this function. See 8-bit Tim-  
ers/Counters T/C0 and T/C2on page 37 for further details, and how to enable the output. The OC0 pin is also the output  
pin for the PWM mode timer function.  
Port B Schematics  
Note that all port pins are synchronized. The synchronization latches are however, not shown in the figures.  
ATmega161(L)  
80  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 57. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pins PB0 and PB1)  
DDBn  
PBn  
PORTBn  
COMx0  
COMx1  
WP: WRITE PORTB  
WD: WRITE DDRB  
RL:  
RP:  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
COMP. MATCH x  
RD: READ DDRB  
PWMx  
FOCx  
n:  
x:  
0,1  
0,2  
CSn2 CSn1 CSn0  
Figure 58. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB2)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
Q
D
DDB2  
C
WD  
RESET  
Q
D
PB2  
PORTB2  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
RXEN1  
RXD1  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
AIN0  
RXD1: UART1 RECEIVE DATA  
RXEN1: UART1 RECEIVE ENABLE  
AIN0:  
ANALOG COMPARATOR POSITIVE INPUT  
81  
Figure 59. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB3)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDB3  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PB3  
PORTB3  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
TXEN1  
TXD1  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
AIN1  
TXD1:  
UART1 TRANSMIT DATA  
TXEN1: UART1 TRANSMIT ENABLE  
AIN1:  
ANALOG COMPARATOR NEGATIVE INPUT  
Figure 60. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB4)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
Q
D
DDB4  
C
WD  
RESET  
Q
D
PB4  
PORTB4  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
MSTR  
SPE  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
MSTR: SPI MASTER ENABLE  
SPE: SPI ENABLE  
SPI SS  
ATmega161(L)  
82  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 61. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB5)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDB5  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PB5  
PORTB5  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
MSTR  
SPE  
SPI MASTER  
OUT  
SPI ENABLE  
MASTER SELECT  
SPE:  
MSTR  
SPI SLAVE  
IN  
Figure 62. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB6)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDB6  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PB6  
PORTB6  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
MSTR  
SPE  
SPI SLAVE  
OUT  
SPI ENABLE  
MASTER SELECT  
SPE:  
MSTR  
SPI MASTER  
IN  
83  
Figure 63. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB7)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDB7  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PB7  
PORTB7  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
MSTR  
SPE  
SPI ClLOCK  
OUT  
SPI ENABLE  
MASTER SELECT  
SPE:  
MSTR  
SPI CLOCK  
IN  
Port C  
Port C is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port.  
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for the Port C, one each for the Data Register PORTC, $15($35), Data  
Direction Register DDRC, $14($34) and the Port C Input Pins PINC, $13($33). The Port C Input Pins address is read  
only, while the Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
All port pins have individually selectable pull-up resistors. The Port C output buffers can sink 20 mA and thus drive LED dis-  
plays directly. When pins PC0 to PC7 are used as inputs and are externally pulled low, they will source current if the  
internal pull-up resistors are activated.  
The Port C pins have alternate functions related to the optional external memory interface. Port C can be configured to be  
the high-order address byte during accesses to external data memory.  
When Port C is set to the alternate function by the SRE External SRAM Enable bit in the MCUCR MCU Control Reg-  
ister, the alternate settings override the data direction register.  
ATmega161(L)  
84  
ATmega161(L)  
Port C Data Register PORTC  
Bit  
7
PORTC7  
R/W  
6
PORTC6  
R/W  
5
PORTC5  
R/W  
4
PORTC4  
R/W  
3
PORTC3  
R/W  
2
PORTC2  
R/W  
1
0
$15 ($35)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
PORTC1  
PORTC0  
PORTC  
DDRC  
PINC  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port C Data Direction Register DDRC  
Bit  
7
DDC7  
R/W  
0
6
DDC6  
R/W  
0
5
DDC5  
R/W  
0
4
DDC4  
R/W  
0
3
DDC3  
R/W  
0
2
DDC2  
R/W  
0
1
DDC1  
R/W  
0
0
DDC0  
R/W  
0
$14 ($34)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
Port C Input Pins Address PINC  
Bit  
7
PINC7  
R
6
PINC6  
R
5
PINC5  
R
4
PINC4  
R
3
PINC3  
R
2
PINC2  
R
1
PINC1  
R
0
PINC0  
R
$13 ($33)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
The Port C Input Pins address PINC is not a register, and this address enables access to the physical value on each  
Port C pin. When reading PORTC, the Port C Data Latch is read, and when reading PINC, the logical values present on the  
pins are read.  
Port C as General Digital I/O  
All 8 pins in Port C have equal functionality when used as digital I/O pins.  
PCn, General I/O pin: The DDCn bit in the DDRC register selects the direction of this pin, if DDCn is set (one), PCn is con-  
figured as an output pin. If DDCn is cleared (zero), PCn is configured as an input pin. If PORTCn is set (one) when the pin  
configured as an input pin, the MOS pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTCn has to be  
cleared (zero) or the pin has to be configured as an output pin.The Port C pins are tri-stated when a reset condition  
becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Table 31. DDCn Effects on Port C Pins  
DDCn  
PORTCn  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
No  
PCn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Push-pull Zero Output  
Push-pull One Output  
Output  
Output  
No  
n: 7, 6,0, pin number  
Port C Schematics  
Note that all port pins are synchronized. The synchronization latch is however, not shown in the figure.  
85  
 
 
 
Figure 64. Port C Schematic Diagram (Pins PC0 - PC7)  
Port D  
Port D is an 8 bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors.  
Three I/O address locations are allocated for the Port D, one each for the Data Register PORTD, $12($32), Data  
Direction Register DDRD, $11($31) and the Port D Input Pins PIND, $10($30). The Port D Input Pins address is read  
only, while the Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
The Port D output buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-  
up resistors are activated.  
Some Port D pins have alternate functions as shown in the following table:  
Table 32. Port D Pins Alternate Functions  
Port Pin  
PD0  
Alternate Function  
RXD0 (UART0 Input line)  
PD1  
TXD0 (UART0 Output line)  
PD2  
INT0 (External interrupt 0 input)  
PD3  
INT1 (External interrupt 1 input)  
PD3  
TOSC1 (RTC oscillator Timer/Counter 2)  
TOSC2 (RTC oscillator Timer/Counter 2)/OC1A (Timer/Counter1 Output compareA match output)  
WR (Write strobe to external memory)  
RD (Read strobe to external memory)  
PD5  
PD6  
PD7  
When the PD5 pin is used for the alternate function (OC1A) the DDRD and PORTD register has to be set according to the  
alternate function description.  
ATmega161(L)  
86  
ATmega161(L)  
Port D Data Register PORTD  
Bit  
7
PORTD7  
R/W  
6
PORTD6  
R/W  
5
PORTD5  
R/W  
4
PORTD4  
R/W  
3
PORTD3  
R/W  
2
PORTD2  
R/W  
1
0
$12 ($32)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
PORTD1  
PORTD0  
PORTD  
DDRD  
PIND  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port D Data Direction Register DDRD  
Bit  
7
DDD7  
R/W  
0
6
DDD6  
R/W  
0
5
DDD5  
R/W  
0
4
DDD4  
R/W  
0
3
DDD3  
R/W  
0
2
DDD2  
R/W  
0
1
DDD1  
R/W  
0
0
DDD0  
R/W  
0
$11 ($31)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
Port D Input Pins Address PIND  
Bit  
7
PIND7  
R
6
PIND6  
R
5
PIND5  
R
4
PIND4  
R
3
PIND3  
R
2
PIND2  
R
1
PIND1  
R
0
PIND0  
R
$10 ($30)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
The Port D Input Pins address PIND is not a register, and this address enables access to the physical value on each  
Port D pin. When reading PORTD, the Port D Data Latch is read, and when reading PIND, the logical values present on the  
pins are read.  
Port D as General Digital I/O  
PDn, General I/O pin: The DDDn bit in the DDRD register selects the direction of this pin. If DDDn is set (one), PDn is con-  
figured as an output pin. If DDDn is cleared (zero), PDn is configured as an input pin. If PORTDn is set (one) when  
configured as an input pin the MOS pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, the PORTDn has to be  
cleared (zero) or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The Port D pins are tri-stated when a reset condition  
becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Table 33. DDDn Bits on Port D Pins  
DDDn  
PORTDn  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
No  
PDn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Push-pull Zero Output  
Push-pull One Output  
Output  
Output  
No  
n: 7,60, pin number.  
Alternate functions of Port D  
RD - Port D, Bit 7  
RD is the external data memory read control strobe.  
WR - Port D, Bit 6  
WR is the external data memory write control strobe.  
OC1 - Port D, Bit 5  
OC1, Output compare match output: The PD5 pin can serve as an external output when the Timer/Counter1 compare  
matches. The PD5 pin has to be configured as an output (DDD5 set (one)) to serve this function. See Timer/Counter1.on  
page 45 for further details, and how to enable the output. The OC1 pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer  
function.  
87  
 
 
 
TOSC1/TOSC2 - Port D, Bit 5 and 4  
When the AS2 bit in ASSR is set (one) to enable asynchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2, pins PD5 and PD4 are discon-  
nected from the port. In this mode, a crystal oscillator is connected to the pins, and the pins can not be used as I/O pins.  
INT1 - Port D, Bit 3  
INT1, External Interrupt source 1: The PD3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source to the MCU. See MCU Control  
Register MCUCRon page 32 for further details.  
INT0 - Port D, Bit 2  
INT0, External Interrupt source 0: The PD2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source to the MCU. See MCU Control  
Register MCUCRon page 32 for further details.  
TXD0 - Port D, Bit 1  
Transmit Data (Data output pin for the UART0). When the UART0 transmitter is enabled, this pin is configured as an output  
regardless of the value of DDRD1.  
RXD0 - Port D, Bit 0  
Receive Data (Data input pin for the UART0). When the UART receiver is enabled this pin is configured as an input regard-  
less of the value of DDRD0. When the UART0 forces this pin to be an input, a logical one in PORTD0 will turn on the  
internal pull-up.  
Port D Schematics  
Note that all port pins are synchronized. The synchronization latches are however, not shown in the figures.  
Figure 65. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD0)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
Q
D
DDD0  
C
WD  
RESET  
Q
D
PD0  
PORTD0  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
RXEN0  
RXD0  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
WRITE PORTD  
WRITE DDRD  
READ PORTD LATCH  
READ PORTD PIN  
READ DDRD  
RXD0:  
UART0 RECEIVE DATA  
RXEN0: UART0 RECEIVE ENABLE  
ATmega161(L)  
88  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 66. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD1)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDD1  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PD1  
PORTD1  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
WRITE PORTD  
WRITE DDRD  
READ PORTD LATCH  
READ PORTD PIN  
READ DDRD  
TXEN0  
TXD0  
TXD0:  
UART0 TRANSMIT DATA  
TXEN0: UART0 TRANSMIT ENABLE  
Figure 67. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pins PD2 and PD3)  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
n:  
WRITE PORTD  
WRITE DDRD  
READ PORTD LATCH  
READ PORTD PIN  
READ DDRD  
2, 3  
m:  
0, 1  
89  
Figure 68. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD4)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDD4  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PD4  
PORTD4  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
WP: WRITE PORTD  
WD: WRITE DDRD  
AS2  
RL: READ PORTD LATCH  
RP: READ PORTD PIN  
RD: READ DDRD  
T/C2 OSC  
AMP INPUT  
AS2: ASYNCH SELECT T/C2  
Figure 69. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD5)  
COMP. MATCH 1A  
PWM10  
PWM11  
FOC1A  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
AS2  
WRITE PORTD  
WRITE DDRD  
READ PORTD LATCH  
READ PORTD PIN  
READ DDRD  
ASYNCH SELECT T/C2  
ATmega161(L)  
90  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 70. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD6)  
WP: WRITE PORTD  
WD: WRITE DDRD  
RL: READ PORTD LATCH  
RP: READ PORTD PIN  
RD: READ DDRD  
WE: WRITE ENABLE  
SRE: EXTERNAL SRAM ENABLE  
Figure 71. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD7)  
WP: WRITE PORTD  
WD: WRITE DDRD  
RL: READ PORTD LATCH  
RP: READ PORTD PIN  
RD: READ DDRD  
RE: READ ENABLE  
SRE: EXTERNAL SRAM ENABLE  
91  
Port E  
Port E is a 3 bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors.  
Three I/O address locations are allocated for the Port E, one each for the Data Register PORTE, $07($27), Data Direc-  
tion Register DDRE, $06($26) and the Port E Input Pins PINE, $05($25). The Port E Input Pins address is read only,  
while the Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
The Port E output buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs, Port E pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-  
up resistors are activated.  
Port E pins have alternate functions as shown in the following table:  
Table 34. Port E Pins Alternate Functions  
Port Pin  
PE0  
Alternate Function  
ICP (Input Capture Pin Timer/Counter1)/INT2 (External Interrupt 2 input)  
OC1B (Timer/Counter1 Output CompareB match output)  
ALE (Address Latch Enable, External Memory)  
PE1  
PE2  
When the PE1 pin is used for the alternate function the DDRE and PORTE register has to be set according to the alternate  
function description.  
Port E Data Register PORTE  
Bit  
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
PORTE2  
R/W  
1
PORTE1  
R/W  
0
PORTE0  
R/W  
$07 ($27)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
PORTE  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
0
0
Port E Data Direction Register DDRE  
Bit  
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
DDE2  
R/W  
0
1
DDE1  
R/W  
0
0
DDE0  
R/W  
0
$06 ($26)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
DDRE  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
Port E Input Pins Address PINE  
Bit  
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
PINE2  
R
1
PINE1  
R
0
PINE0  
R
$05 ($25)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
PINE  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
The Port E Input Pins address PINE is not a register, and this address enables access to the physical value on each  
Port E pin. When reading PORTE, the Port E Data Latch is read, and when reading PINE, the logical values present on the  
pins are read.  
Port E as General Digital I/O  
PEn, General I/O pin: The DDEn bit in the DDRE register selects the direction of this pin. If DDEn is set (one), PEn is con-  
figured as an output pin. If DDEn is cleared (zero), PEn is configured as an input pin. If PORTEn is set (one) when  
configured as an input pin the MOS pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off the PORTEn has to be  
cleared (zero) or the pin has to be configured as an output pin.The Port E pins are tri-stated when a reset condition  
becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
ATmega161(L)  
92  
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 35. DDEn Bits on Port E Pins  
DDEn  
PORTEn  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
No  
PEn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Push-pull Zero Output  
Output  
Output  
No  
Push-pull One Output  
n: 2,1,0, pin number.  
Alternate functions of Port E  
OC1B - Port E, Bit 2  
OC1B, Output compare match output: The PE2 pin can serve as an external output when the Timer/Counter1 compare  
matches. The PE2 pin has to be configured as an output (DDE2 set (one)) to serve this function. See Timer/Counter1.on  
page 45 for further details. The OC1B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function.  
ALE - Port E, Bit 1  
ALE: When the External Memory is enabled, the PE1 pin serves as the Dress Latch Enable. Note that enabling of External  
Memory will override both the direction and port value. See Interface to external memoryon page 72 for a detailed  
description.  
ICP/INT2 - Port E, Bit 0  
ICP, input capture pin: The PE0 pin can serve as the input capture source for Timer/Counter 1. See page 49 for a detailed  
description.  
INT2, External Interrupt source 2: The PE0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source to the MCU. See Extended MCU  
Control Register EMCUCRon page 33 for further details.  
Port E Schematics  
Figure 72. Port E Schematic Diagram (Pin PE0)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
Q
D
DDE0  
C
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PE0  
PORTE0  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
WP: WRITE PORTE  
WD: WRITE DDRE  
0
1
NOISE CANCELER  
ICNC1  
EDGE SELECT  
ICES1  
ICF1  
RL:  
RP:  
READ PORTE LATCH  
READ PORTE PIN  
RD: READ DDRE  
ACIC: COMPARATOR IC ENABLE  
ACO: COMPARATOR OUTPUT  
ACIC  
ACO  
'1'  
Q
D
INT2  
PORTE0  
C
R
HW CLEAR  
SW CLEAR  
ISC2  
93  
Figure 73. Port E Schematic Diagram (Pin PE1)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDE1  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PORTE1  
C
PE1  
RL  
WP  
RP  
WP: WRITE PORTE  
WD: WRITE DDRE  
SRE  
ALE  
RL:  
RP:  
READ PORTE LATCH  
READ PORTE PIN  
RD: READ DDRE  
SRE: XRAM ENABLE  
ALE: ALE PULSE FROM XRAM  
Figure 74. Port E Schematic Diagram (Pin PE2  
DDE2  
PE2  
PORTE2  
COM1B0  
COM1B1  
WP: WRITE PORTE  
WD: WRITE DDRE  
RL:  
RP:  
READ PORTE LATCH  
READ PORTE PIN  
COMP. MATCH 1B  
RD: READ DDRE  
PWM10  
PWM11  
FOC1B  
ATmega161(L)  
94  
ATmega161(L)  
Memory Programming  
Boot Loader Support  
The ATmega161 provides a mechanism for downloading and uploading program code by the MCU itself. This feature  
allows flexible application software updates, controlled by the MCU using a Flash-resident Boot Loader program.  
The ATmega161 FLASH memory is organized in two main sections;  
1. The Application code section (address $0000 - $1DFF)  
2. The Boot Loader section/Boot block (address $1E00 - $1FFF)  
Figure 75. Memory sections  
Program Memory  
$0000  
Application Code section  
(7.5K x 16)  
$1DFF  
$1E00  
Boot Loader section  
(512 x 16)  
$1FFF  
Boot Loader program can use any available data interface and associated protocol, such as UART serial bus interface, to  
input or output program code, and write (program) that code into the Flash memory, or read the code from the program  
memory.  
The program Flash memory is divided into pages that contains 128 bytes each. The Boot Loader FLASH section occupies  
8 pages from $1E00 to $1FFF by 16 bit words.  
95  
The Store Program Memory (SPM) instruction can access the entire FLASH, but it can only be executed from the Boot  
Loader FLASH section. If no Boot Loader capability is needed, the entire FLASH is available for application code. The  
ATmega161 has two separate sets of Boot Lock Bits which can be set independently. This gives the user a unique flexibility  
to select different levels of protection. The user can select:  
To protect the entire FLASH from a software update by the Boot Loader Program.  
To only protect the Boot Loader section from a software update by the Boot Loader Program.  
To only protect the Application code section from a software update by the Boot Loader Program.  
Allowing software update in the entire FLASH  
See Table 36 and Table 37 for further details. The Boot Lock bits can be set in software and in Serial or Parallel  
Programming mode, but they can only be cleared by a chip erase command.  
Table 36. Boot Lock Bit0 Protection modes (Application section)  
BLB0 mode  
BLB01  
BLB02  
Protection  
1
2
3
1
0
0
1
1
0
No restrictions for SPM, LPM in the Application code section (address $0000 - $1DFF)  
It is not allowed to update the Application code section (address $0000 - $1DFF) by SPM.  
LPM read and SPM write prohibited in the Application code section (address $0000 - $1DFF)  
It is not allowed to read program code located in the Application code section (address $0000 -  
$1DFF) by LPM  
4
1
0
Note:  
1means unprogrammed, 0means programmed  
Table 37. Boot Lock Bit1 Protection modes (Boot Loader section)  
BLB1 mode  
BLB11  
BLB12  
Protection  
1
2
3
1
0
0
1
1
0
No restrictions for SPM, LPM in the Boot Loader section (address $1E00 - $1FFF)  
It is not allowed to update the Boot Loader section (address $1E00 - $1FFF) by SPM  
LPM and SPM prohibited in the Boot Loader section (address $1E00 - $1FFF)  
It is not allowed to read program code located in the Boot Loader section (address $1E00 -  
$1FFF) by LPM  
4
1
0
Note:  
1means unprogrammed, 0means programmed  
Entering the Boot Loader Program  
Entering the Boot Loader takes place by a jump or call from the application program. This may be initiated by some trigger  
such as a command received via UART or SPI interface. Alternatively, the Boot Reset Fuse (BOOTRST) can be pro-  
grammed so that the reset vector is pointing to address $1E00 after a reset. In this case, the Boot Loader is started after  
the reset. After the application code is loaded, the program can start executing the application code. Note that the fuses  
cannot be changed by the MCU itself. This means that once the Boot Reset Fuse is programmed, the Reset Vector will  
always point to the Boot Loader Reset and the fuse can only be changed through the serial or parallel programming inter-  
face. The BOOTRST fuse can also be locked by programming LB1. When LB1 is programmed it is not possible to change  
the BOOTRST fuse unless a chip erase command is performed first.  
Table 38. Boot Reset Fuse, BOOTRST  
BOOTRST  
Reset Address  
1
0
Reset Vector = Application reset (address $0000)  
Reset Vector = Boot Loader reset (address $1E00)  
Note:  
1means unprogrammed, 0means programmed  
ATmega161(L)  
96  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Capabilities of the Boot Loader  
The program code within the Boot Loader section has the capability to read from and write into the entire FLASH, including  
the Boot Loader Memory. This allows the user to update both the Application code and the Boot Loader code that handles  
the software update. The Boot Loader can thus even modify itself, and it can also erase itself from the code if the feature is  
not needed anymore. Special care must be taken if the user allows the Boot Loader section to be updated by leaving Boot  
Lock bit11 unprogrammed. An accidental write to the Boot Loader itself can corrupt the entire Boot Loader, and further soft-  
ware updates might be impossible. If it is not needed to change the Boot Loader software itself, it is recommended to  
program the Boot Lock bit11 to protect the Boot Loader software from software changes.  
Self-programming the Flash  
Programming of the Flash is executed one page at a time. The Flash page must be erased first for correct programming.  
The general Write Lock (Lock Bit 2) does not control the programming of the Flash memory by SPM instruction. Similarly,  
the Read/Write Lock (Lock Bit 1) does not control reading nor writing by LPM/SPM, if it is attempted.  
The program memory can only be updated page by page, not word by word. One page is 128 bytes (64 words). The pro-  
gram memory will be modified by first performing page erase, then filling the temporary page buffer one word at a time  
using SPM, and then executing page write. If only part of the page needs to be changed, the other parts must be stored  
(for example in the temporary page buffer) before the erase, and then be rewritten. The temporary page buffer can be  
accessed in a random sequence. The CPU is halted both during page erase and during page write. It is essential that the  
page address used in both the page erase and page write operation is addressing the same page.  
Setting the Boot Loader Lock Bits by SPM  
To set the Boot Loader Lock bits, write the desired data to R0, write "1001" to SPMCR and execute SPM within four clock  
cycles after writing SPMCR. The only accessible lock bits are the Boot Lock bits that may prevent the Application and Boot  
Loader section from any software update by the MCU. See Table 36 and Table 37 how the different settings of the Boot  
Loader Bits affect the FLASH access.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
BLB12  
BLB11  
BLB02  
BLB01  
-
-
R0  
If bit5 - bit2 in R0 is cleared (zero), the corresponding Boot Lock Bit will be programmed if a SPM instruction is executed  
within four cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in SPMCR.  
Performing Page Erase by SPM  
To execute page erase, set up the address in the Z pointer, write "0011" to SPMCR and execute SPM within four clock  
cycles after writing SPMCR. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The page address must be written to Z13:Z7. Other bits in  
the Z pointer will be ignored during this operation.  
Fill the temporary buffer  
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z pointer and data in R1:R0, write "0001" to SPMCR and execute  
SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCR. The content of Z6:Z1 is used to address the data in the temporary  
buffer. Z13:Z7 must point to the page that is supposed to be written.  
Perform a Page Write  
To execute page write, set up the address in the Z pointer, write "0101" to SPMCR and execute SPM within four clock  
cycles after writing SPMCR. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The page address must be written to Z13:Z7. During this  
operation, Z6:Z0 must be zero to ensure that the page is written correctly.  
97  
Addressing the FLASH During Self-programming  
The Z pointer is used to address the SPM commands.  
Bit  
15  
Z15  
Z7  
7
14  
Z14  
Z6  
6
13  
Z13  
Z5  
5
12  
Z12  
Z4  
4
11  
Z11  
Z3  
3
10  
Z10  
Z2  
2
9
Z9  
Z1  
1
8
Z8  
Z0  
0
$1F ($1F)  
$1E ($1E)  
ZH  
ZL  
Z15:Z14 always ignored  
Z13:Z7 page select, for page erase, page write  
Z6:Z1  
Z0  
word select, for filling temp buffer (must be zero during page write operation)  
should be zero for all SPM commands, byte select for the LPM instruction.  
The only operation that does not use the Z pointer is Setting the Boot Loader Lock Bits. The content of the Z pointer is  
ignored and will have no effect on the operation.  
Note that the page erase and page write operation is addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the  
Boot Loader software addresses the same page in both the page erase and page write operation.  
The LPM instruction does also use the Z pointer to store the address. Since this instruction does address the FLASH byte  
by byte, also the LSB (bit Z0) of the Z pointer is used. See page 16 for a detailed description.  
Accidental writing into Flash program by the SPM instruction is prevented by setting up a "SPM enable time window". All  
accesses are executed by first setting I/O bits, and then executing SPM within four clock cycles. The I/O register that con-  
trols the SPM accesses is defined as follows:  
Store Program Memory Control Register SPMCR  
The Store Program Memory Control Register contains the control bits needed to control the programming of the FLASH  
from internal code execution.  
Bit  
7
-
6
-
5
4
3
BLBSET  
R/W  
2
PGWRT  
R/W  
0
1
PGERS  
R/W  
0
0
SPMEN  
R/W  
0
$37 ($57)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
SPMCR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
Bit 7..4 - Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
Bit 3 - BLBSET: Boot Lock Bit set  
If this bit is set at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles sets Boot Lock bits, according  
to the data in R0. The data in R1 and the address in the Z pointer are ignored. The BLBSET bit will auto-clear upon comple-  
tion of lock bit set, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during lock bit setting.  
Only a chip erase can clear the Lock Bits.  
An LPM instruction within four cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in the SPMCR register, will put either the Lock-bits  
or the Fuse-bits (depending od the Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the destination register. See Reading the Fuse- and Lock Bits  
from Softwareon page 99 for details.  
Bit 2 - PGWRT: Page write  
If this bit is set at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes page write, with the  
data stored in the temporary buffer. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z pointer. The data in R1 and R0  
are ignored. The PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a page write, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four  
clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire page write operation.  
Bit 1 - PGERS: Page Erase  
If this bit is set at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes page erase. The  
page address is taken from the high part of the Z pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will auto-clear  
upon completion of a page erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the  
entire page erase operation.  
ATmega161(L)  
98  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Bit 0 - SPMEN: Store Program Memory Enable  
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If set together with either BLBSET, PGWRT or PGERS,  
the following SPM instruction will have a special meaning, see description above. If only SPMEN is set, the following SPM  
instruction will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z pointer. The LSB of the Z pointer  
is ignored. The SPMEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of an SPM instruction, or if no SPM instruction is executed  
within four clock cycles.  
Writing any other combination that "1001", "0101", "0011" or "0001" in the lower four bits, or writing to the I/O register when  
any bits are set, will have no effect.  
EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCR  
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to Flash. Reading the Fuses and Lockbits from  
software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It is recommended that the user checks the status bit  
(EEWE) in the EECR register and verifies that the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCR register.  
Reading the Fuse- and Lock Bits from Software  
It is possible to read both the Fuse and Lock bits from software. To read the Lock bits, load the Z-pointer with $0001 and  
set the BLBSET and SPMEN bits in SPMCR. If an LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the BLBSET  
and SPMEN bits are set in SPMCR, the Lock bits will be written to the destination register. The BLBSET and SPMEN bits  
will auto-clear upon completion of reading the Lock bits or if no LPM/SPM instruction is executed within three/four CPU  
cycles. When BLBSET and SPMEN are cleared, LPM will work as described in Constant Addressing Using the LPM  
Instructionon page 16 and in the Instruction set Manual.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
BLB12  
BLB11  
BLB02  
BLB01  
LB2  
LB1  
R0/Rd  
The algorithm for reading the Fuse bits is similar to the one described above for reading the Lock bits. But when reading the  
Fuse bits, load $0000 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and  
SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCR, the Fuse-bits can be read in the destination register as shown below.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
BOOTRST  
SPIEN  
BODLEVEL  
BODEN  
CKSEL[2]  
CKSEL[1]  
CKSEL[0]  
R0/Rd  
Fuse- and lock bits that are programmed, will be read as zero.  
99  
Program Memory Lock Bits  
The ATmega161 MCU provides six Lock bits which can be left unprogrammed (1) or can be programmed (0) to obtain  
the additional features listed in Table 39. The Lock bits can only be erased to 1with the Chip Erase command.  
Table 39. Lock Bit Protection Modes  
Memory Lock Bits  
Protection Type  
LB mode  
LB1  
LB2  
1
2
1
1
No memory lock features enabled  
Further programming of the Flash and EEPROM is disabled in parallel and serial programming  
mode. The Fuse bits are locked in both serial and parallel programming mode.(1)  
0
0
1
0
Further programming and verification of the FLASH and EEPROM is disabled in parallel and  
serial programming mode. The Fuse bits are locked in both serial and parallel programming  
3
mode.(1)  
.
BLB0 mode BLB01 BLB02  
No memory lock features on SPM and LPM in Application code section (address $0000 -  
$1DFF).  
1
1
1
2
3
4
0
0
1
1
0
0
SPM prohibited in the Application code section (address $0000 - $1DFF)  
LPM and SPM prohibited in the Application code section (address $0000 - $1DFF)  
LPM prohibited in the Application code section (address $0000 - $1DFF)  
BLB1 mode BLB11 BLB12  
1
2
3
4
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
No memory lock features on SPM and LPM in Boot Loader section (address $1E00 - $1FFF).  
SPM prohibited in the Boot Loader section (address $1E00 - $1FFF)  
LPM and SPM prohibited in the Boot Loader section (address $1E00 - $1FFF)  
LPM prohibited in the Boot Loader section (address $1E00 - $1FFF)  
Note:  
1. Program the Fuse bits before programming the Lock bits.  
Fuse Bits  
The ATmega161 has seven fuse bits, BOOTRST, SPIEN, BODLEVEL, BODEN and CKSEL [2:0].  
When BOOTRST is programmed (0), the reset vector is set to address $1E00 which is the first address location in the  
Boot Loader section of the FLASH. If the BOOTRST is unprogrammed (1), the reset vector is set to address $0000.  
Default value is unprogrammed (1).  
When the SPIEN Fuse is programmed (0), Serial Program and Data Downloading is enabled. Default value is  
programmed (0). The SPIEN Fuse is not accessible in serial programming mode.  
The BODLEVEL Fuse selects the Brown-out Detection Level and changes the Start-up times. See Brown-out Detection”  
on page 27. Default value is unprogrammed (1).  
When the BODEN Fuse is programmed (0), the Brown-out Detector is enabled. See Brown-out Detectionon page 27.  
Default value is unprogrammed (1).  
CKSEL2..0: See Table 4, Reset Delay Selections,on page 25, for which combination of CKSEL2..0 to use. Default  
value is 010.  
The status of the Fuse bits is not affected by Chip Erase. Note that the Fuse bits are locked if lock bit1 (LB1) or lock bit2  
(LB2) is programmed. Program the Fuse bits before programming the Lock bits.  
ATmega161(L)  
100  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Signature Bytes  
All Atmel microcontrollers have a three-byte signature code which identifies the device. This code can be read in both serial  
and parallel mode. The three bytes reside in a separate address space, and for the ATmega161 they are:  
1. $000: $1E (indicates manufactured by Atmel)  
2. $001: $94 (indicates 16KB Flash memory)  
3. $002: $01 (indicates ATmega161 device when $001 is $94)  
Programming the Flash and EEPROM  
Atmels ATmega161 offers 16K bytes of in-system reprogrammable Flash Program memory and 512 bytes of EEPROM  
Data memory.  
The ATmega161 is normally shipped with the on-chip Flash Program and EEPROM Data memory arrays in the erased  
state (i.e. contents = $FF) and ready to be programmed. This device supports a High-voltage (12V) Parallel programming  
mode and a Low-voltage Serial programming mode. The +12V is used for programming enable only, and no current of sig-  
nificance is drawn by this pin. The serial programming mode provides a convenient way to download the Program and Data  
into the ATmega161 inside the users system.  
The Program memory array on the ATmega161 is organized as 128 pages of 128 bytes each. When programming the  
Flash, the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be programmed simulta-  
neously in either programming mode.  
The EEPROM Data memory array on the ATmega161 is programmed byte-by-byte in either programming mode. An auto-  
erase cycle is provided with the self-timed EEPROM programming operation in the serial programming mode.  
During programming, the supply voltage must be in accordance with Table .  
Table 40. Supply voltage during programming  
Part  
Serial programming  
2.7 - 5.5V  
Parallel programming  
4.5 - 5.5V  
ATmega161L  
ATmega161  
4.0 - 5.5V  
4.5 - 5.5V  
Parallel Programming  
This section describes how to parallel program and verify Flash Program memory, EEPROM Data memory, Lock bits and  
Fuse bits in the ATmega161. Pulses are assumed to be at least 500ns unless otherwise noted.  
Signal Names  
In this section, some pins of the ATmega161 are referenced by signal names describing their functionality during parallel  
programming, see Figure 76 and Table 41. Pins not described in the following table are referenced by pin names.  
The XA1/XA0 pins determine the action executed when the XTAL1 pin is given a positive pulse. The bit coding are shown  
in Table 42.  
When pulsing WR or OE, the command loaded determines the action executed. The Command is a byte where the differ-  
ent bits are assigned functions as shown in Table 43.  
101  
 
Figure 76. Parallel Programming  
ATmega161  
+5V  
RDY/BSY  
PD1  
PD2  
PD3  
PD4  
PD5  
PD6  
PD7  
VCC  
PB7 - PB0  
OE  
WR  
DATA  
BS1  
XA0  
XA1  
PAGEL  
+12 V  
RESET  
PA0  
XTAL1  
GND  
Table 41. Pin Name Mapping  
Signal Name in Programming Mode  
Pin Name I/O Function  
RDY/BSY  
OE  
PD1  
PD2  
PD3  
PD4  
PD5  
PD6  
PD7  
PA0  
O
I
0: Device is busy programming, 1: Device is ready for new command  
Output Enable (Active low)  
WR  
I
Write Pulse (Active low)  
BS1  
I
Byte Select 1 (0selects low byte, 1selects high byte)  
XTAL Action Bit 0  
XA0  
I
XA1  
I
XTAL Action Bit 1  
PAGEL  
BS2  
I
Program Memory Page Load  
I
Byte Select 2 (Always low)  
DATA  
PB7-0  
I/O Bidirectional Databus (Output when OE is low)  
Table 42. XA1 and XA0 Coding  
XA1  
XA0  
Action when XTAL1 is Pulsed  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Load Flash or EEPROM Address (High or low address byte determined by BS1)  
Load Data (High or Low data byte for Flash determined by BS1)  
Load Command  
No Action, Idle  
ATmega161(L)  
102  
ATmega161(L)  
Table 43. Command Byte Bit Coding  
Command Byte  
1000 0000  
Command Executed  
Chip Erase  
0100 0000  
Write Fuse Bits  
Write Lock Bits  
Write Flash  
0010 0000  
0001 0000  
0001 0001  
Write EEPROM  
Read Signature Bytes  
Read Fuse and Lock Bits  
Read Flash  
0000 1000  
0000 0100  
0000 0010  
0000 0011  
Read EEPROM  
Enter Programming Mode  
The following algorithm puts the device in parallel programming mode:  
1. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between VCC and GND.  
2. Set RESET and BS pins to 0and wait at least 500 ns.  
3. Apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET, and wait for at least 500 ns.  
Chip Erase  
The Chip Erase will erase the Flash and EEPROM memories plus Lock bits. The Lock bits are not reset until the program  
memory has been completely erased. The Fuse bits are not changed. A Chip Erase must be performed before the Flash is  
reprogrammed.  
Load Command Chip Erase”  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to 10. This enables command loading.  
2. Set BS1 to 0.  
3. Set DATA to 1000 0000. This is the command for Chip Erase.  
4. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts the Chip Erase. RDY/BSY goes low.  
5. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high before loading a new command.  
Programming the Flash  
The Flash is organized as 128 pages of 128 bytes each. When programming the Flash, the program data is latched into a  
page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be programmed simultaneously. The following procedure describes  
how to program the entire Flash memory:  
A. Load Command "Write Flash"  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to '10'. This enables command loading.  
2. Set BS1 to '0'.  
3. Set DATA to '0001 0000'. This is the command for Write Flash.  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command.  
B. Load Address Low byte  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to '00'. This enables address loading.  
2. Set BS1 to '0'. This selects low address.  
3. Set DATA = Address low byte ($00 - $FF).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address low byte.  
103  
 
C. Load Data Low Byte  
1. Set BS1 to 0. This selects low data byte.  
2. Set XA1, XA0 to 01. This enables data loading.  
3. Set DATA = Data low byte ($00 - $FF).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.  
D. Latch Data Low Byte  
Give PAGEL a positive pulse. This latches the data low byte.  
(See Figure 77 for signal waveforms)  
E. Load Data High Byte  
1. Set BS1 to 1. This selects high data byte.  
2. Set XA1, XA0 to 01. This enables data loading.  
3. Set DATA = Data high byte ($00 - $FF).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.  
F. Latch Data High Byte  
Give PAGEL a positive pulse. This latches the data high byte.  
G. Repeat B through F 64 times to fill the page buffer.  
To address a page in the FLASH, 7 bits are needed (128 pages). The 5 most significant bits are read from address high  
byte as described in section Hbelow. The two least significant page address bits however, are the two most significant  
bits (bit7 and bit6) of the latest loaded address low byte as described in section B.  
H. Load Address High byte  
1. 1. Set XA1, XA0 to '00'. This enables address loading.  
2. Set BS1 to '1'. This selects high address.  
3. Set DATA = Address high byte ($00 - $1F).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address high byte.  
I. Program Page  
1. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the entire page of data. RDY/BSYgoes low.  
2. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high.  
(See Figure 78 for signal waveforms)  
J. End Page Programming  
1. 1. Set XA1, XA0 to '10'. This enables command loading.  
2. Set DATA to '0000 0000'. This is the command for No Operation.  
3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command, and the internal write signals are reset.  
K. Repeat A through J 128 times or until all data have been programmed.  
ATmega161(L)  
104  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 77. Programming the Flash waveforms  
DATA  
$10  
ADDR. LOW  
ADDR. HIGH  
DATA LOW  
XA1  
XA2  
BS1  
XTAL1  
WR  
RDY/BSY  
RESET  
+12V  
OE  
BS2  
PAGEL  
Figure 78. Programming the Flash waveforms (continued)  
DATA  
DATA HIGH  
XA1  
XA0  
BS1  
XTAL1  
WR  
RDY/BSY  
RESET  
OE  
+12V  
PAGEL  
BS2  
105  
Programming the EEPROM  
The programming algorithm for the EEPROM data memory is as follows (refer to Programming the Flashon page 103 for  
details on Command, Address and Data loading):  
1. A: Load Command 0001 0001.  
2. H: Load Address High Byte ($00 - $01)  
3. B: Load Address Low Byte ($00 - $FF)  
4. E: Load Data Low Byte ($00 - $FF)  
L: Write Data Low Byte  
1. Set BS to 0. This selects low data.  
2. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the data byte. RDY/BSY goes low.  
3. Wait until to RDY/BSY goes high before programming the next byte.  
(See Figure 79 for signal waveforms)  
The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For efficient programming, the following  
should be considered.  
The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory locations.  
Address high byte needs only be loaded before programming a new 256 word page in the EEPROM.  
Skip writing the data value $FF, that is the contents of the entire EEPROM after a Chip Erase.  
These considerations also applies to Flash, EEPROM and Signature bytes reading.  
Figure 79. Programming the EEPROM waveforms  
DATA  
$11  
ADDR. HIGH  
ADDR. LOW  
DATA LOW  
XA1  
XA2  
BS1  
XTAL1  
WR  
RDY/BSY  
RESET  
+12V  
OE  
BS2  
PAGEL  
ATmega161(L)  
106  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Reading the Flash  
The algorithm for reading the Flash memory is as follows (refer to Programming the Flashon page 103 for details on  
Command and Address loading):  
1. A: Load Command 0000 0010.  
2. H: Load Address High Byte ($00 - $1F)  
3. B: Load Address Low Byte ($00 - $FF)  
4. Set OE to 0, and BS1 to 0. The Flash word low byte can now be read at DATA.  
5. Set BS to 1. The Flash word high byte can now be read at DATA.  
6. Set OE to 1.  
Reading the EEPROM  
The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to Programming the Flashon page 103 for details on  
Command and Address loading):  
1. A: Load Command 0000 0011.  
2. H: Load Address High Byte ($00 - $01)  
3. B: Load Address ($00 - $FF)  
4. Set OE to 0, and BS1 to 0. The EEPROM Data byte can now be read at DATA.  
5. Set OE to 1.  
Programming the Fuse Bits  
The algorithm for programming the Fuse bits is as follows (refer to Programming the Flashon page 103 for details on  
Command and Data loading):  
1. A: Load Command 0100 0000.  
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = 0programs and bit n = 1erases the Fuse bit.  
Bit 6 = BOOTRST Fuse bit  
Bit 5 = SPIEN Fuse bit  
Bit 4 = BODLEVEL Fuse bit  
Bit 3 = BODEN Fuse bit  
Bit 2-0 = CKSEL2..0 Fuse bits  
Bit 7 = 1. This bit is reserved and should be left unprogrammed (1).  
3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.  
Programming the Lock Bits  
The algorithm for programming the Lock bits is as follows (refer to Programming the Flashon page 103 for details on  
Command and Data loading):  
1. A: Load Command 0010 0000.  
2. D: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = 0programs the Lock bit.  
Bit 5 = Boot Lock Bit12  
Bit 4 = Boot Lock Bit11  
Bit 3 = Boot Lock Bit02  
Bit 2 = Boot Lock Bit01  
Bit 1 = Lock Bit2  
Bit 0 = Lock Bit1  
Bit 7-6 = 1. These bits are reserved and should be left unprogrammed (1).  
3. L: Write Data Low Byte.  
The Lock bits can only be cleared by executing Chip Erase.  
107  
Reading the Fuse And Lock Bits  
The algorithm for reading the Fuse and Lock bits is as follows (refer to Programming the Flashon page 103 for details on  
Command loading):  
1. A: Load Command 0000 0100.  
2. Set OE to 0, and BS to 0. The status of the Fuse bits can now be read at DATA (0means programmed).  
Bit 6 = BOOTRST Fuse bit  
Bit 5 = SPIEN Fuse bit  
Bit 4 = BODLEVEL Fuse bit  
Bit 3 = BODEN Fuse bit  
Bit 2-0 = CKSEL2..0 Fuse bits  
3. Set OE to 0, and BS to 1. The status of the Lock bits can now be read at DATA (0means programmed).  
Bit 5 = Boot Lock Bit12  
Bit 4 = Boot Lock Bit11  
Bit 3 = Boot Lock Bit02  
Bit 2 = Boot Lock Bit01  
Bit 1 = Lock Bit2  
Bit 0 = Lock Bit1  
4. Set OE to 1.  
Reading the Signature Bytes  
The algorithm for reading the Signature bytes is as follows (refer to Programming the Flash for details on Command and  
Address loading):  
1. A: Load Command 0000 1000.  
2. C: Load Address Low Byte ($00 - $02).  
Set OE to 0, and BS to 0. The selected Signature byte can now be read at DATA.  
3. Set OE to 1.  
Parallel Programming Characteristics  
Figure 80. Parallel Programming Timing  
tXLWL  
tXHXL  
XTAL1  
tDVXH  
tXLDX  
Data & Contol  
(DATA, XA0/1, BS1)  
tBVXH  
tPLBX tBVWL  
tRHBX  
PAGEL  
tPHPL  
tWLWH  
WR  
tPLWL  
WLRL  
RDY/BSY  
tWLRH  
tOHDZ  
OE  
tXLOL  
tOLDV  
DATA  
ATmega161(L)  
108  
ATmega161(L)  
Table 44. Parallel Programming Characteristics, TA = 25°C ± 10%, VCC =5V ± 10%  
Symbol  
VPP  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
12.5  
250  
Units  
Programming Enable Voltage  
Programming Enable Current  
Data and Control Valid before XTAL1 High  
XTAL1 Pulse Width High  
11.5  
V
IPP  
µA  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
ms  
ms  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDVXH  
tXHXL  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
0
tXLDX  
Data and Control Hold after XTAL1 Low  
XTAL1 Low to WR Low  
tXLWL  
tBVXH  
tPHPL  
BS1 Valid before XTAL1 High  
PAGEL Pulse Width High  
tPLBX  
BS1 Hold after PAGEL Low  
PAGEL Low to WR Low  
tPLWL  
tBVWL  
tRHBX  
tWLWH  
tWLRL  
tWLRH  
tWLRH_CE  
tWLRH_FLASH  
tXLOL  
BS1 Valid to WR Low  
BS1 Hold after RDY/BSY High  
WR Pulse Width Low  
WR Low to RDY/BSY Low  
WR Low to RDY/BSY High(1)  
WR Low to RDY/BSY High for Chip Erase(2)  
WR Low to RDY/BSY High for Write Flash(3)  
XTAL1 Low to OE Low  
2.5  
0.9  
18  
9
0.5  
10  
5
0.7  
14  
7
67  
tOLDV  
tOHDZ  
OE Low to DATA Valid  
20  
OE High to DATA Tri-stated  
20  
Notes: 1. tWLRH is valid for the Write EEPROM, Write Fuse Bits and Write Lock Bits commands.  
2. tWLRH_CE is valid for the Chip Erase command.  
3.  
tWLRH_FLASH is valid for the Write Flash command.  
Serial Downloading  
Both the Flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using the serial SPI bus while RESET is pulled to GND.  
The serial interface consists of pins SCK, MOSI (input) and MISO (output). After RESET is set low, the Programming  
Enable instruction needs to be executed first before program/erase operations can be executed.  
When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed programming operation (in the serial  
mode ONLY) and there is no need to first execute the Chip Erase instruction. The Chip Erase operation turns the content of  
every memory location in both the Program and EEPROM arrays into $FF.  
The Program and EEPROM memory arrays have separate address spaces:  
$0000 to $1FFF for Program memory and $0000 to $01FF for EEPROM memory.  
Either an external system clock is supplied at pin XTAL1 or a crystal needs to be connected across pins XTAL1 and  
XTAL2.The minimum low and high periods for the serial clock (SCK) input are defined as follows:  
Low:> 2 XTAL1 clock cycle  
High:> 2 XTAL1 clock cycles  
109  
 
 
 
Serial Programming Algorithm  
When writing serial data to the ATmega161, data is clocked on the rising edge of SCK.  
When reading data from the ATmega161, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK. See Figure 81, Figure 82 and Table  
47 for timing details.  
To program and verify the ATmega161 in the serial programming mode, the following sequence is recommended (See four  
byte instruction formats in Table 46):  
1. Power-up sequence:  
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to 0. If a crystal is not connected across pins  
XTAL1 and XTAL2, apply a clock signal to the XTAL1 pin. In some systems, the programmer can not guarantee that  
SCK is held low during power-up. In this case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at least two XTAL1 cycles  
duration after SCK has been set to 0.  
2. Wait for at least 20 ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming Enable serial instruction to pin  
MOSI/PB5.  
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of synchronization. When in sync. the  
second byte ($53), will echo back when issuing the third byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether the  
echo is correct or not, all 4 bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the $53 did not echo back, give RESET a  
positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command.  
4. If a chip erase is performed (must be done to erase the Flash), give RESET a positive pulse, and start over from  
Step 2.  
5. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at a time by supplying the  
6 LSB of the address and data together with the Load Program Memory Page instruction. The Program Memory  
Page is stored by loading the Write Program Memory Page instruction with the 7 MSB of the address. If polling is  
not used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before issuing the next page. (Please refer to Table 45). Accessing  
the serial programming interface before the Flash write operation completes can result in incorrect programming.  
6. The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and data together with the appro-  
priate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is first automatically erased before new data is written. If  
polling is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte. (Please refer to Table 45). In  
a chip erased device, no $FFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed.  
7. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the content at the selected  
address at serial output MISO/PB6.  
8. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal operation.  
9. Power-off sequence (if needed):  
Set XTAL1 to 0(if a crystal is not used).  
Set RESET to 1.  
Turn VCC power-off  
Data Polling FLASH  
When a page is being programmed into the Flash, reading an address location within the page being programmed will give  
the value $FF. At the time the device is ready for a new page, the programmed value will read correctly. This is used to  
determine when the next page can be written. Note that the entire page is written simultaneously and any address within  
the page can be used for polling. Data polling of the FLASH will not work for the value $FF, so when programming this  
value, the user will have to wait for at least tWD_FLASH before programming the next page. As a chip-erased device contains  
$FF in all locations, programming of addresses that are meant to contain $FF, can be skipped. See Table 45 for tWD_FLASH  
value.  
ATmega161(L)  
110  
ATmega161(L)  
Data Polling EEPROM  
When a new byte has been written and is being programmed into EEPROM, reading the address location being pro-  
grammed will give the value $FF. At the time the device is ready for a new byte, the programmed value will read correctly.  
This is used to determine when the next byte can be written. This will not work for the value $FF, but the user should have  
the following in mind: As a chip-erased device contains $FF in all locations, programming of addresses that are meant to  
contain $FF, can be skipped. This does not apply if the EEPROM is re-programmed without chip-erasing the device. In this  
case, data polling cannot be used for the value $FF, and the user will have to wait at least tWD_EEPROM before programming  
the next byte. See Table 45 for tWD_EEPROM value.  
Table 45. Minimum wait delay before writing the next Flash or EEPROM location  
Symbol  
3.2V  
3.6V  
4.0V  
5.0V  
tWD_FLASH  
tWD_EEPROM  
28 ms  
9 ms  
22 ms  
7 ms  
18 ms  
6 ms  
11 ms  
4 ms  
Figure 81. Serial Programming Waveforms  
SERIAL DATA INPUT  
MSB  
LSB  
PB5 (MOSI)  
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT  
MSB  
LSB  
PB6 (MISO)  
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT  
PB7(SCK)  
SAMPLE  
111  
 
.
Table 46. Serial Programming Instruction Set  
Instruction  
Instruction Format  
Operation  
Byte 1  
Byte 2  
Byte 3  
Byte4  
1010 1100  
0101 0011  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
Enable Serial Programming after  
RESET goes low.  
Programming Enable  
Chip Erase  
1010 1100  
100x xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
Chip Erase EEPROM and Flash.  
0010 H000  
xxxa aaaa  
bbbb bbbb  
oooo oooo  
Read H (high or low) data o from  
Program memory at word address  
a:b.  
Read Program Memory  
0100 H000  
xxxx xxxx  
xxbb bbbb  
iiii iiii  
Write H (high or low) data i to  
Program Memory page at word  
address b.  
Load Program Memory  
Page  
Write Program Memory  
Page  
0100 1100  
1010 0000  
1100 0000  
0101 1000  
1010 1100  
0011 0000  
1010 1100  
1010 0000  
xxxa aaaa  
xxxx xxxa  
xxxx xxxa  
xxxx xxxx  
111x xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
101x xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
bbxx xxxx  
bbbb bbbb  
bbbb bbbb  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxbb  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
iiii iiii  
oooo oooo  
iiii iiii  
xx65 4321  
1165 4321  
oooo oooo  
1DCB A987  
xDCB A987  
Write Program Memory Page at  
address a:b.  
Read data o from EEPROM  
memory at address a:b.  
Read EEPROM Memory  
Write EEPROM Memory  
Read Lock Bits  
Write data i to EEPROM memory at  
address a:b.  
Read Lock bits. 0= programmed,  
1= unprogrammed.  
Write Lock bits. Set bits 6 - 1 = 0to  
program Lock bits.  
Write Lock Bits  
Read Signature Byte o at address  
b.  
Read Signature Byte  
Write Fuse Bits  
Set bits D - A, 9 - 7 = 0to  
program, 1to unprogram  
Read Fuse bits. 0= programmed,  
1= unprogrammed  
Read Fuse Bits  
Note:  
a = address high bits  
b = address low bits  
H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte  
o = data out  
i = data in  
x = dont care  
1 = lock bit 1  
2 = lock bit 2  
3 = Boot Lock Bit01  
4 = Boot Lock Bit02  
5 = Boot Lock Bit11  
6 = Boot Lock Bit12  
7 = CKSEL0 Fuse  
8 = CKSEL1 Fuse  
9 = CKSEL2 Fuse  
A = BODEN Fuse  
B = BODLEVEL Fuse  
C = SPIEN Fuse  
D = BOOTRST Fuse  
ATmega161(L)  
112  
ATmega161(L)  
Serial Programming Characteristics  
Figure 82. Serial Programming Timing  
MOSI  
tSLSH  
tOVSH  
tSHOX  
SCK  
tSHSL  
MISO  
tSLIV  
Table 47. Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V (Unless otherwise noted)  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Typ  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
Oscillator Frequency (VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V)  
Oscillator Period (VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V)  
Oscillator Frequency (VCC = 4.0 - 5.5V)  
Oscillator Period (VCC = 4.0 - 5.5V)  
SCK Pulse Width High  
4
250  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
0
8
MHz  
ns  
125  
tSHSL  
2 tCLCL  
2 tCLCL  
tCLCL  
2 tCLCL  
10  
ns  
tSLSH  
SCK Pulse Width Low  
ns  
tOVSH  
tSHOX  
tSLIV  
MOSI Setup to SCK High  
ns  
MOSI Hold after SCK High  
SCK Low to MISO Valid  
ns  
16  
32  
ns  
Electrical Characteristics  
Absolute Maximum Ratings*  
*NOTICE:  
Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute  
Maximum Ratingsmay cause permanent dam-  
age to the device. This is a stress rating only and  
functional operation of the device at these or  
other conditions beyond those indicated in the  
operational sections of this specification is not  
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect  
device reliability.  
Operating Temperature.................................. -55°C to +125°C  
Storage Temperature..................................... -65°C to +150°C  
Voltage on any Pin except RESET  
with respect to Ground ................................-1.0V to VCC+0.5V  
Voltage on RESET with respect to Ground......-1.0V to +13.0V  
Maximum Operating Voltage ............................................ 6.6V  
DC Current per I/O Pin ............................................... 40.0 mA  
DC Current VCC and GND Pins................................ 200.0 mA  
113  
DC Characteristics  
TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)  
Symbol  
VIL  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
-0.5  
Typ  
Max  
0.3 VCC  
0.2 VCC  
Units  
(1)  
(1)  
Input Low Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
(Except XTAL1)  
(XTAL1)  
V
V
V
V
V
VIL1  
-0.5  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
VIH  
(Except XTAL1, RESET)  
(XTAL1)  
0.6 VCC  
0.8 VCC  
0.9 VCC  
VCC + 0.5  
VCC + 0.5  
VCC + 0.5  
VIH1  
VIH2  
(RESET)  
Output Low Voltage(3)  
(Ports A,B,C,D)  
I
OL = 20 mA, VCC = 5V  
0.6  
0.5  
V
V
VOL  
VOH  
IIL  
IOL = 10 mA, VCC = 3V  
Output High Voltage(4)  
(Ports A,B,C,D)  
IOH = -3 mA, VCC = 5V  
I
4.2  
2.3  
V
V
OH = -1.5 mA, VCC = 3V  
Input Leakage  
Current I/O pin  
Vcc = 5.5V, pin low  
(absolute value)  
8.0  
µA  
nA  
Input Leakage  
Current I/O pin  
Vcc = 5.5V, pin high  
(absolute value)  
IIH  
980  
RRST  
RI/O  
Reset Pull-up Resistor  
I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor  
100  
35  
500  
120  
kΩ  
kΩ  
ICC  
Active Mode, VCC = 3V,  
4MHz  
3.0  
1.2  
mA  
mA  
Power Supply Current  
Idle Mode VCC = 3V,  
4MHz  
WDT enabled, VCC = 3V  
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V  
9
15.0  
2.0  
µA  
µA  
Power-down Mode(5)  
<1  
Analog Comparator  
Input Offset Voltage  
VACIO  
IACLK  
tACPD  
VCC = 5V  
40  
50  
mV  
nA  
ns  
Analog Comparator  
Input Leakage Current  
VCC = 5V  
Vin = VCC/2  
-50  
Analog Comparator  
Propagation Delay  
VCC = 2.7V  
750  
500  
VCC = 4.0V  
Notes: 1. Maxmeans the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low  
2. Minmeans the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high  
3. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (20 mA at Vcc = 5V, 10 mA at Vcc = 3V) under steady state  
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:  
1] The sum of all IOL, for all ports, should not exceed 200 mA.  
2] The sum of all IOL, for ports B0 - B7, D0 - D7 and XTAL2, should not exceed 100 mA.  
3] The sum of all IOL, for ports A0 - A7, ALE, OC1B and C0 - C7 should not exceed 100 mA.  
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater  
than the listed test condition.  
4. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (3 mA at Vcc = 5V, 1.5 mA at Vcc = 3V) under steady state  
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:  
1] The sum of all IOH, for all ports, should not exceed 200 mA.  
2] The sum of all IOH, for ports B0 - B7, D0 - D7 and XTAL2, should not exceed 100 mA.  
3] The sum of all IOH, for ports A0 - A7, ALE, OC1B and C0 - C7 should not exceed 100 mA.  
If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current  
greater than the listed test condition.  
5. Minimum VCC for Power-down is 2V.  
ATmega161(L)  
114  
 
 
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
External Clock Drive Waveforms  
Figure 83. External Clock  
VIH1  
VIL1  
Table 48. External Clock Drive  
VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V  
VCC = 4.0V to 5.5V  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Parameter  
Oscillator Frequency  
Clock Period  
High Time  
Min  
0
Max  
Min  
0
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
4
8
250  
100  
100  
125  
50  
tCHCX  
tCLCX  
ns  
Low Time  
50  
ns  
tCLCH  
Rise Time  
1.6  
1.6  
0.5  
0.5  
µs  
tCHCL  
Fall Time  
µs  
Note:  
See External Data Memory Timingon page 116. for a description of how the duty cycle influences the timing for the External  
Data Memory  
115  
External Data Memory Timing  
Table 49. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.0 - 5.5V, No Wait State  
8 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tLHLL  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1
2
Oscillator Frequency  
ALE Pulse Width  
0.0  
8.0  
TBD  
TBD  
tCLCL - TBD  
tAVLL  
Address Valid A to ALE Low  
0.5tCLCL - TBD(1)  
ns  
Address Hold After ALE Low,  
ST/STD/STS Instructions  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
ns  
ns  
3a tLLAX_ST  
3b tLLAX_LD  
Address Hold after ALE Low,  
LD/LDD/LDS Instructions  
TBD  
4
5
6
7
8
9
tAVLLC  
tAVRL  
tAVWL  
tLLWL  
tLLRL  
Address Valid C to ALE Low  
Address Valid to RD Low  
Address Valid to WR Low  
ALE Low to WR Low  
ALE Low to RD Low  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD(1)  
1.0tCLCL - TBD  
1.0tCLCL - TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD(2)  
0.5tCLCL - TBD(2)  
TBD  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
TBD  
TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD(2)  
0.5tCLCL - TBD(2)  
tDVRH  
Data Setup to RD High  
Read Low to Data Valid  
Data Hold After RD High  
RD Pulse Width  
10 tRLDV  
11 tRHDX  
12 tRLRH  
13 tDVWL  
14 tWHDX  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
1.0tCLCL - TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD(1)  
0.5tCLCL - TBD(1)  
1.0tCLCL - TBD  
1.0tCLCL - TBD  
Data Setup to WR Low  
Data Hold After WR High  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
Notes: 1. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the high time of the external clock, XTAL1.  
2. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the low time of the external clock, XTAL1.  
Table 50. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.0 - 5.5V, 1 Cycle Wait State  
8 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
8.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
TBD  
2.0tCLCL - TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
2.0tCLCL - TBD  
2.0tCLCL - TBD  
2.0tCLCL - TBD  
ns  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
ATmega161(L)  
116  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 51. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.0 - 5.5V, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
8.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
ns  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
Table 52. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.0 - 5.5V, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
8.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
14 tWHDX  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
1.5tCLCL - TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
ns  
Data Hold After WR High  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Table 53. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5V, No Wait State  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tLHLL  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
0.0  
Max  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1
2
Oscillator Frequency  
ALE Pulse Width  
4.0  
TBD  
TBD  
tCLCL - TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD  
tAVLL  
Address Valid A to ALE Low  
ns  
Address Hold After ALE Low,  
ST/STD/STS Instructions  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
ns  
ns  
3a tLLAX_ST  
3b tLLAX_LD  
Address Hold after ALE Low,  
LD/LDD/LDS Instructions  
4
5
6
7
8
9
tAVLLC  
tAVRL  
tAVWL  
tLLWL  
tLLRL  
Address Valid C to ALE Low  
Address Valid to RD Low  
Address Valid to WR Low  
ALE Low to WR Low  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD  
1.0tCLCL - TBD  
1.0tCLCL - TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD  
TBD  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
TBD  
TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD  
ALE Low to RD Low  
tDVRH  
Data Setup to RD High  
Read Low to Data Valid  
Data Hold After RD High  
10 tRLDV  
11 tRHDX  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
117  
Table 53. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5V, No Wait State (Continued)  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Min Max  
Symbol  
12 tRLRH  
Parameter  
Min  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
RD Pulse Width  
1.0tCLCL - TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD  
0.5tCLCL - TBD  
1.0tCLCL - TBD  
1.0tCLCL - TBD  
13 tDVWL  
14 tWHDX  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
Data Setup to WR Low  
Data Hold After WR High  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Notes: 1. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the high time of the external clock, XTAL1.  
2. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the low time of the external clock, XTAL1.  
Table 54. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5V, SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 1  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
4.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
TBD  
2.0tCLCL - TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
2.0tCLCL - TBD  
2.0tCLCL - TBD  
2.0tCLCL - TBD  
ns  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
Table 55. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5V, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
4.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
ns  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
Table 56. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5V, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
4.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
14 tWHDX  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
1.5tCLCL - TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
3.0tCLCL - TBD  
ns  
Data Hold After WR High  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ATmega161(L)  
118  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 84. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 0  
T4  
T1  
T2  
T3  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
1
4
2
7
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
Address  
15  
Address [15..8]  
Data / Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
XX  
3a 13  
Prev. data  
Address  
6
Data  
16  
14  
3b  
11  
9
Data  
XX  
Address  
5
Prev. data  
XX  
Data / Address [7..0]  
RD  
10  
8
12  
Figure 85. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 1)  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T5  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
1
4
2
7
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
Address [15..8]  
Data / Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
15  
3a 13  
Prev. data  
Address  
6
XX  
14  
16  
3b  
11  
9
Data  
XX  
Address  
5
Prev. data  
XX  
Data / Address [7..0]  
RD  
10  
8
12  
119  
Figure 86. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0)  
T4  
T5  
T6  
T1  
T2  
T3  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
1
4
2
7
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
Address [15..8]  
Data / Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
XX  
15  
3a 13  
Prev. data  
Address  
6
14  
16  
9
3b  
11  
Data  
XX  
Address  
5
Prev. data  
XX  
Data / Address [7..0]  
RD  
10  
8
12  
Figure 87. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1)  
T4  
T6  
T5  
T7  
T1  
T2  
T3  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
1
4
2
7
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
Address [15..8]  
Data / Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
XX  
15  
3a 13  
Prev. data  
Address  
6
14  
16  
9
3b  
11  
Data  
Address  
5
XX  
Prev. data  
XX  
Data / Address [7..0]  
RD  
10  
8
12  
Note:  
The ALE pulse in the last period (T4 - T7) is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). The  
Data and Address will only change in T4 - T7 if ALE is present (the next instruction accesses the RAM).  
ATmega161(L)  
120  
ATmega161(L)  
Typical Characteristics Preliminary Data  
Analog comparator offset voltage is measured as absolute offset  
Figure 88. Analog Comparator Offset Voltage vs, Common Mode Voltage  
ANALOG COMPARATOR OFFSET VOLTAGE vs.  
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
6
4
2
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
Common Mode Voltage (V)  
Figure 89. Analog Comparator Offset Voltage vs. Common Mode Voltage  
ANALOG COMPARATOR OFFSET VOLTAGE vs.  
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
10  
8
TA = 25˚C  
6
TA = 85˚C  
4
2
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
Common Mode Voltage (V)  
121  
Figure 90. Analog Comparator Input Leakage Current  
ANALOG COMPARATOR INPUT LEAKAGE CURRENT  
VCC = 6V  
TA = 25˚C  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
-10  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
V (V)  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
6.5  
7
IN  
Figure 91. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. Vcc  
1600  
1400  
1200  
1000  
800  
600  
400  
200  
0
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
Vcc (V)  
ATmega161(L)  
122  
ATmega161(L)  
Sink and source capabilities of I/O ports are measured on one pin at a time.  
Figure 92. Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage  
PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
VOP(V)  
Figure 93. Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage  
PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VOP(V)  
123  
Figure 94. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VOL (V)  
Figure 95. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
20  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
6
4
2
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
VOH(V)  
ATmega161(L)  
124  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 96. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
TA = 25˚C  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
TA = 85˚C  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
VOL (V)  
Figure 97. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VOH(V)  
125  
Figure 98. I/O Pin Input Threshols vs. VCC  
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. Vcc  
TA = 25˚C  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
2.7  
4.0  
5.0  
Vcc  
Figure 99. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC  
I/O PIN INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. Vcc  
TA = 25˚C  
0.18  
0.16  
0.14  
0.12  
0.1  
0.08  
0.06  
0.04  
0.02  
0
2.7  
4.0  
5.0  
Vcc  
ATmega161(L)  
126  
ATmega161(L)  
Register Summary  
Address  
Name  
SREG  
SPH  
SPL  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Page  
$3F ($5F)  
$3E ($5E)  
$3D ($5D)  
$3C ($5C)  
$3B ($5B)  
$3A ($5A)  
$39 ($59)  
$38 ($58)  
$37 ($57)  
$36 ($56)  
$35 ($55)  
$34 ($54)  
$33 ($53)  
$32 ($52)  
$31 ($51)  
$30 ($50)  
$2F ($4F)  
$2E ($4E)  
$2D ($4D)  
$2C ($4C)  
$2B ($4B)  
$2A ($4A)  
$29 ($49)  
$28 ($48)  
$27 ($47)  
$26 ($46)  
$25 ($45)  
$24 ($44)  
$23 ($43)  
$22 ($42)  
$21 ($41)  
$20 ($40)  
$1F ($3F)  
$1E ($3E)  
$1D ($3D)  
$1C ($3C)  
$1B ($3B)  
$1A ($3A)  
$19 ($39)  
$18 ($38)  
$17 ($37)  
$16 ($36)  
$15 ($35)  
$14 ($34)  
$13 ($33)  
$12 ($32)  
$11 ($31)  
$10 ($30)  
$0F ($2F)  
$0E ($2E)  
$0D ($2D)  
$0C ($2C)  
$0B ($2B)  
$0A ($2A)  
$09 ($29)  
$08 ($28)  
$07 ($27)  
I
T
H
SP13  
SP5  
S
SP12  
SP4  
V
SP11  
SP3  
N
SP10  
SP2  
Z
SP9  
SP1  
C
SP8  
SP0  
21  
22  
22  
SP15  
SP7  
SP14  
SP6  
Reserved  
GIMSK  
GIFR  
TIMSK  
TIFR  
SPMCR  
EMCUCR  
MCUCR  
MCUSR  
TCCR0  
TCNT0  
OCR0  
INT1  
INTF1  
TOIE1  
TOV1  
-
INT0  
INTF0  
OCIE1A  
OCF1A  
-
INT2  
INTF2  
OCIE1B  
OCF1B  
-
-
-
-
-
-
29  
30  
30  
31  
98  
33  
32  
28  
38  
40  
40  
36  
46  
47  
48  
48  
49  
49  
49  
49  
38  
43  
49  
49  
40  
40  
53  
67  
54  
54  
54  
54  
77  
77  
77  
79  
79  
79  
85  
85  
85  
87  
87  
87  
60  
59  
59  
64  
64  
65  
68  
70  
92  
OCIE2  
OCFI2  
-
TICIE1  
ICF1  
TOIE2  
TOV2  
TOIE0  
TOV0  
OCIE0  
OCIF0  
SPMEN  
ISC2  
ISC00  
PORF  
CS00  
LBSET  
SRW01  
ISC11  
WDRF  
CTC0  
PGWRT  
SRW00  
ISC10  
BORF  
CS02  
PGERS  
SRW11  
ISC01  
EXTRF  
CS01  
SM0  
SRE  
-
SRL2  
SRW10  
-
SRL1  
SE  
-
SRL0  
SM1  
-
FOC0  
PWM0  
COM01  
COM00  
Timer/Counter0 Counter Register  
Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register  
SFIOR  
TCCR1A  
TCCR1B  
TCNT1H  
TCNT1L  
OCR1AH  
OCR1AL  
OCR1BH  
OCR1BL  
TCCR2  
ASSR  
ICR1H  
ICR1L  
TCNT2  
OCR2  
WDTCR  
UBRRHI  
EEARH  
EEARL  
EEDR  
-
-
-
-
-
-
PSR2  
PWM11  
CS11  
PSR10  
PWM10  
CS10  
COM1A1  
ICNC1  
COM1A0  
ICES1  
COM1B1  
-
COM1B0  
-
FOC1A  
CTC1  
FOC1B  
CS12  
Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register Low Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte  
FOC2  
-
Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register Low Byte  
Timer/Counter2 Counter Register  
PWM2  
-
COM21  
-
COM20  
-
CTC2  
AS20  
CS22  
TCON2UB  
CS21  
OCR2UB  
CS20  
TCR2UB  
Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register  
-
-
-
WDTOE  
-
WDE  
UBRR0[11:8]  
-
WDP2  
-
WDP1  
-
WDP0  
UBRR1[11:8]  
-
-
-
EEAR8  
EEPROM Address Register Low Byte  
EEPROM Data Register  
EECR  
PORTA  
DDRA  
-
-
-
-
EERIE  
PORTA3  
DDA3  
EEMWE  
PORTA2  
DDA2  
EEWE  
PORTA1  
DDA1  
EERE  
PORTA0  
DDA0  
PORTA7  
DDA7  
PINA7  
PORTB7  
DDB7  
PINB7  
PORTC7  
DDC7  
PINC7  
PORTD7  
DDD7  
PORTA6  
DDA6  
PINA6  
PORTB6  
DDB6  
PINB6  
PORTC6  
DDC6  
PINC6  
PORTD6  
DDD6  
PORTA5  
DDA5  
PINA5  
PORTB5  
DDB5  
PINB5  
PORTC5  
DDC5  
PINC5  
PORTD5  
DDD5  
PORTA4  
DDA4  
PINA4  
PORTB4  
DDB4  
PINB4  
PORTC4  
DDC4  
PINC4  
PORTD4  
DDD4  
PINA  
PINA3  
PINA2  
PINA1  
PINA0  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PINB  
PORTC  
DDRC  
PINC  
PORTB3  
DDB3  
PINB3  
PORTC3  
DDC3  
PINC3  
PORTB2  
DDB2  
PINB2  
PORTC2  
DDC2  
PINC2  
PORTB1  
DDB1  
PINB1  
PORTC1  
DDC1  
PINC1  
PORTD1  
DDD1  
PORTB0  
DDB0  
PINB0  
PORTC0  
DDC0  
PINC0  
PORTD0  
DDD0  
PORTD  
DDRD  
PIND  
SPDR  
SPSR  
PORTD3  
DDD3  
PIND3  
PORTD2  
DDD2  
PIND2  
PIND7  
SPI Data Register  
SPIF  
SPIE  
PIND6  
PIND5  
PIND4  
PIND1  
PIND0  
WCOL  
SPE  
-
-
-
-
-
SPI2X  
SPR0  
SPCR  
DORD  
MSTR  
CPOL  
CPHA  
SPR1  
UDR0  
UART0 I/O Data Register  
RXC0  
RXCIE0  
UART0 Baud Rate Register  
ACD  
-
UCSR0A  
UCSR0B  
UBRR0  
ACSR  
TXC0  
TXCIE0  
UDRE0  
UDRIE0  
FE0  
RXEN0  
OR0  
TXEN0  
-
U2X0  
RXB80  
MPCM0  
TXB80  
CHR90  
AINBG  
-
ACO  
-
ACI  
-
ACIE  
-
ACIC  
PORTE2  
ACIS1  
PORTE1  
ACIS0  
PORTE0  
PORTE  
127  
Register Summary (Continued)  
Address  
Name  
DDRE  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Page  
$06 ($26)  
$05 ($25)  
$04 ($24)  
$03 ($23)  
$02 ($22)  
$01 ($21)  
$00 ($20)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DDE2  
PINE2  
DDE1  
PINE1  
DDE0  
PINE0  
92  
92  
PINE  
Reserved  
UDR1  
UCSR1A  
UCSR1B  
UBRR1  
UART1 I/O Data Register  
RXC1  
RXCIE1  
UART1 Baud Rate Register  
64  
64  
65  
68  
TXC1  
TXCIE1  
UDRE1  
UDRIE1  
FE1  
RXEN1  
OR1  
TXEN1  
-
U2X1  
RXB81  
MPCM1  
TXB81  
CHR91  
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses  
should never be written.  
2. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that the CBI and SBI instructions will operate on  
all bits in the I/O register, writing a one back into any flag read as set, thus clearing the flag. The CBI and SBI instructions  
work with registers $00 to $1F only.  
ATmega161(L)  
128  
ATmega161(L)  
Instruction Set Summary  
Mnemonics  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
#Clocks  
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS  
ADD  
ADC  
ADIW  
SUB  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rdl,K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rdl,K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd  
Add two Registers  
Rd Rd + Rr  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,N,V  
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
Add with Carry two Registers  
Add Immediate to Word  
Subtract two Registers  
Subtract Constant from Register  
Subtract with Carry two Registers  
Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg.  
Subtract Immediate from Word  
Logical AND Registers  
Logical AND Register and Constant  
Logical OR Registers  
Logical OR Register and Constant  
Exclusive OR Registers  
Ones Complement  
Twos Complement  
Set Bit(s) in Register  
Rd Rd + Rr + C  
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl + K  
Rd Rd - Rr  
SUBI  
SBC  
SBCI  
SBIW  
AND  
ANDI  
OR  
ORI  
EOR  
COM  
NEG  
SBR  
Rd Rd - K  
Rd Rd - Rr - C  
Rd Rd - K - C  
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl - K  
Rd Rd Rr  
Rd Rd K  
Z,N,V  
Rd Rd v Rr  
Rd Rd v K  
Rd Rd Rr  
Rd $FF Rd  
Rd $00 Rd  
Rd Rd v K  
Z,N,V  
Z,N,V  
Z,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Rd,K  
Rd,K  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
CBR  
INC  
DEC  
TST  
CLR  
SER  
Clear Bit(s) in Register  
Increment  
Decrement  
Test for Zero or Minus  
Clear Register  
Set Register  
Rd Rd ($FF - K)  
Rd Rd + 1  
Rd Rd 1  
Rd Rd Rd  
Rd Rd Rd  
Rd $FF  
Z,N,V  
Z,N,V  
Z,N,V  
Z,N,V  
Z,N,V  
None  
Rd  
Rd  
MUL  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Multiply Unsigned  
Multiply Signed  
Multiply Signed with Unsigned  
Fractional Multiply Unsigned  
Fractional Multiply Signed  
Fractional Multiply Signed with Unsigned  
R1:R0 Rd x Rr  
R1:R0 Rd x Rr  
R1:R0 Rd x Rr  
R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1  
R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1  
R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1  
Z,C  
Z,C  
Z,C  
Z,C  
Z,C  
Z,C  
MULS  
MULSU  
FMUL  
FMULS  
FMULSU  
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS  
RJMP  
IJMP  
JMP  
RCALL  
ICALL  
CALL  
RET  
k
Relative Jump  
Indirect Jump to (Z)  
Direct Jump  
Relative Subroutine Call  
Indirect Call to (Z)  
PC PC + k + 1  
PC Z  
PC k  
PC PC + k + 1  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
I
2
2
3
3
3
k
k
PC Z  
k
Direct Subroutine Call  
Subroutine Return  
Interrupt Return  
PC k  
PC STACK  
PC STACK  
4
4
4
RETI  
CPSE  
CP  
CPC  
Rd,Rr  
Rd,Rr  
Rd,Rr  
Compare, Skip if Equal  
Compare  
Compare with Carry  
if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3  
Rd Rr  
Rd Rr C  
None  
Z, N,V,C,H  
Z, N,V,C,H  
Z, N,V,C,H  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1/2/3  
1
1
CPI  
Rd,K  
Rr, b  
Rr, b  
P, b  
P, b  
s, k  
s, k  
k
k
k
k
k
Compare Register with Immediate  
Skip if Bit in Register Cleared  
Skip if Bit in Register is Set  
Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared  
Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set  
Branch if Status Flag Set  
Branch if Status Flag Cleared  
Branch if Equal  
Branch if Not Equal  
Branch if Carry Set  
Branch if Carry Cleared  
Branch if Same or Higher  
Branch if Lower  
Rd K  
1
SBRC  
SBRS  
SBIC  
SBIS  
if (Rr(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (Rr(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (P(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (P(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (SREG(s) = 1) then PCPC+k + 1  
if (SREG(s) = 0) then PCPC+k + 1  
if (Z = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (Z = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V= 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V= 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
BRBS  
BRBC  
BREQ  
BRNE  
BRCS  
BRCC  
BRSH  
BRLO  
BRMI  
BRPL  
BRGE  
BRLT  
BRHS  
BRHC  
BRTS  
BRTC  
k
k
k
k
k
k
Branch if Minus  
Branch if Plus  
Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed  
Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed  
Branch if Half Carry Flag Set  
Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared  
Branch if T Flag Set  
k
k
k
Branch if T Flag Cleared  
129  
Instruction Set Summary (Continued)  
Mnemonics  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
#Clocks  
BRVS  
BRVC  
BRIE  
BRID  
k
k
k
k
Branch if Overflow Flag is Set  
Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared  
Branch if Interrupt Enabled  
Branch if Interrupt Disabled  
if (V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if ( I = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if ( I = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS  
MOV  
MOVW  
LDI  
LD  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Move Between Registers  
Copy Register Word  
Load Immediate  
Rd Rr  
Rd+1:Rd Rr+1:Rr  
Rd K  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
-
Rd, X  
Load Indirect  
Rd (X)  
LD  
LD  
LD  
LD  
LD  
LDD  
LD  
LD  
LD  
Rd, X+  
Rd, - X  
Rd, Y  
Rd, Y+  
Rd, - Y  
Rd,Y+q  
Rd, Z  
Rd, Z+  
Rd, -Z  
Rd, Z+q  
Rd, k  
Load Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Load Indirect  
Load Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Load Indirect with Displacement  
Load Indirect  
Load Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Load Indirect with Displacement  
Load Direct from SRAM  
Store Indirect  
Rd (X), X X + 1  
X X - 1, Rd (X)  
Rd (Y)  
Rd (Y), Y Y + 1  
Y Y - 1, Rd (Y)  
Rd (Y + q)  
Rd (Z)  
Rd (Z), Z Z+1  
Z Z - 1, Rd (Z)  
Rd (Z + q)  
Rd (k)  
LDD  
LDS  
ST  
X, Rr  
(X) Rr  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
STD  
ST  
ST  
ST  
STD  
STS  
LPM  
LPM  
LPM  
SPM  
IN  
OUT  
PUSH  
POP  
X+, Rr  
- X, Rr  
Y, Rr  
Y+, Rr  
- Y, Rr  
Y+q,Rr  
Z, Rr  
Z+, Rr  
-Z, Rr  
Z+q,Rr  
k, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Store Indirect  
Store Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Store Indirect with Displacement  
Store Indirect  
Store Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Store Indirect with Displacement  
Store Direct to SRAM  
Load Program Memory  
Load Program Memory  
Load Program Memory and Post-Inc  
Store Program Memory  
In Port  
(X) Rr, X X + 1  
X X - 1, (X) Rr  
(Y) Rr  
(Y) Rr, Y Y + 1  
Y Y - 1, (Y) Rr  
(Y + q) Rr  
(Z) Rr  
(Z) Rr, Z Z + 1  
Z Z - 1, (Z) Rr  
(Z + q) Rr  
(k) Rr  
R0 (Z)  
Rd, Z  
Rd, Z+  
Rd (Z)  
Rd (Z), Z Z+1  
(Z) R1:R0  
Rd P  
P Rr  
Rd, P  
P, Rr  
Rr  
1
1
2
2
Out Port  
Push Register on Stack  
Pop Register from Stack  
STACK Rr  
Rd STACK  
Rd  
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS  
SBI  
CBI  
LSL  
P,b  
P,b  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
s
Set Bit in I/O Register  
Clear Bit in I/O Register  
Logical Shift Left  
Logical Shift Right  
Rotate Left Through Carry  
Rotate Right Through Carry  
Arithmetic Shift Right  
Swap Nibbles  
I/O(P,b) 1  
I/O(P,b) 0  
Rd(n+1) Rd(n), Rd(0) 0  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), Rd(7) 0  
None  
None  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LSR  
ROL  
ROR  
ASR  
SWAP  
BSET  
BCLR  
BST  
BLD  
SEC  
CLC  
SEN  
CLN  
SEZ  
CLZ  
SEI  
Rd(0)C,Rd(n+1) Rd(n),C Rd(7)  
Rd(7)C,Rd(n) Rd(n+1),C Rd(0)  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), n=0..6  
Rd(3..0) Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4) Rd(3..0)  
SREG(s) 1  
SREG(s) 0  
T Rr(b)  
Rd(b) T  
C 1  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
None  
SREG(s)  
SREG(s)  
Flag Set  
Flag Clear  
s
Rr, b  
Rd, b  
Bit Store from Register to T  
Bit load from T to Register  
Set Carry  
T
None  
C
C
N
N
Z
Z
I
Clear Carry  
C 0  
N 1  
N 0  
Set Negative Flag  
Clear Negative Flag  
Set Zero Flag  
Z 1  
Z 0  
I 1  
I 0  
Clear Zero Flag  
Global Interrupt Enable  
Global Interrupt Disable  
Set Signed Test Flag  
CLI  
SES  
I
S
S 1  
ATmega161(L)  
130  
ATmega161(L)  
Instruction Set Summary (Continued)  
Mnemonics  
CLS  
SEV  
CLV  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
#Clocks  
Clear Signed Test Flag  
Set Twos Complement Overflow.  
Clear Twos Complement Overflow  
Set T in SREG  
S 0  
V 1  
V 0  
T 1  
T 0  
H 1  
H 0  
S
V
V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
SET  
CLT  
T
T
H
H
None  
None  
None  
Clear T in SREG  
SEH  
CLH  
NOP  
SLEEP  
WDR  
Set Half Carry Flag in SREG  
Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG  
No Operation  
Sleep  
(see specific descr. for Sleep function)  
(see specific descr. for WDR/timer)  
Watchdog Reset  
131  
Ordering Information  
Speed (MHz)  
Power Supply  
Ordering Code  
Package  
Operation Range  
4
2.7 - 5.5V  
ATmega161-4AC  
ATmega161-4JC  
ATmega161-4PC  
44A  
44J  
Commercial  
(0°C to 70°C)  
40P6  
ATmega161-4AI  
ATmega161-4JI  
ATmega161-4PI  
44A  
44J  
Industrial  
(-40°C to 85°C)  
40P6  
8
4.0 - 5.5V  
ATmega161-8AC  
ATmega161-8JC  
ATmega161-8PC  
44A  
44J  
Commercial  
(0°C to 70°C)  
40P6  
ATmega161-8AI  
ATmega161-8JI  
ATmega161-8PI  
44A  
44J  
Industrial  
(-40°C to 85°C)  
40P6  
Package Type  
44A  
44J  
44-lead, Thin (1.0 mm) Plastic Gull-Wing Quad Flat Package (TQFP)  
44-lead, Plastic J-leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC)  
40P6  
40-lead, 0.600Wide, Plastic Dual-in-line Package (PDIP)  
ATmega161(L)  
132  
ATmega161(L)  
Packaging Information  
44A, 44-lead, Thin (1.0 mm) Plastic Gull-Wing Quad  
Flat Package (TQFP)  
44J, 44-lead, Plastic J-leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC)  
Dimensions in Inches and (Millimeters)  
Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)*  
.045(1.14) X 30° - 45°  
12.21(0.478)  
11.75(0.458)  
.045(1.14) X 45°  
PIN NO. 1  
IDENTIFY  
.012(.305)  
.008(.203)  
SQ  
PIN 1 ID  
.630(16.0)  
.590(15.0)  
.656(16.7)  
.650(16.5)  
SQ  
0.45(0.018)  
0.30(0.012)  
0.80(0.031) BSC  
.032(.813)  
.026(.660)  
.021(.533)  
.013(.330)  
.695(17.7)  
.685(17.4)  
SQ  
.043(1.09)  
.020(.508)  
.120(3.05)  
.050(1.27) TYP  
.500(12.7) REF SQ  
.090(2.29)  
.180(4.57)  
.165(4.19)  
10.10(0.394)  
9.90(0.386)  
SQ  
1.20(0.047) MAX  
0
7
0.20(.008)  
0.09(.003)  
.022(.559) X 45° MAX (3X)  
0.75(0.030) 0.15(0.006)  
0.45(0.018) 0.05(0.002)  
*Controlling dimension: millimeters  
40P6, 40-lead, 0.600" Wide,  
Plastic Dual-in-line Package (PDIP)  
Dimensions in Inches and (Millimeters)  
JEDEC STANDARD MS-011 AC  
2.07(52.6)  
2.04(51.8)  
PIN  
1
.566(14.4)  
.530(13.5)  
.090(2.29)  
MAX  
1.900(48.26) REF  
.220(5.59)  
MAX  
.005(.127)  
MIN  
SEATING  
PLANE  
.065(1.65)  
.015(.381)  
.161(4.09)  
.125(3.18)  
.022(.559)  
.014(.356)  
.065(1.65)  
.041(1.04)  
.110(2.79)  
.090(2.29)  
.630(16.0)  
.590(15.0)  
0
15  
REF  
.012(.305)  
.008(.203)  
.690(17.5)  
.610(15.5)  
133  
Atmel Headquarters  
Atmel Operations  
Corporate Headquarters  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
TEL (408) 441-0311  
FAX (408) 487-2600  
Atmel Colorado Springs  
1150 E. Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd.  
Colorado Springs, CO 80906  
TEL (719) 576-3300  
FAX (719) 540-1759  
Europe  
Atmel Rousset  
Atmel U.K., Ltd.  
Zone Industrielle  
13106 Rousset Cedex  
France  
Coliseum Business Centre  
Riverside Way  
Camberley, Surrey GU15 3YL  
England  
TEL (33) 4-4253-6000  
FAX (33) 4-4253-6001  
TEL (44) 1276-686-677  
FAX (44) 1276-686-697  
Asia  
Atmel Asia, Ltd.  
Room 1219  
Chinachem Golden Plaza  
77 Mody Road Tsimhatsui  
East Kowloon  
Hong Kong  
TEL (852) 2721-9778  
FAX (852) 2722-1369  
Japan  
Atmel Japan K.K.  
9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg.  
1-24-8 Shinkawa  
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033  
Japan  
TEL (81) 3-3523-3551  
FAX (81) 3-3523-7581  
Fax-on-Demand  
North America:  
1-(800) 292-8635  
International:  
1-(408) 441-0732  
e-mail  
literature@atmel.com  
Web Site  
http://www.atmel.com  
BBS  
1-(408) 436-4309  
© Atmel Corporation 1999.  
Atmel Corporation makes no warranty for the use of its products, other than those expressly contained in the Companys standard war-  
ranty which is detailed in Atmels Terms and Conditions located on the Companys web site. The Company assumes no responsibility for  
any errors which may appear in this document, reserves the right to change devices or specifications detailed herein at any time without  
notice, and does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. No licenses to patents or other intellectual prop-  
erty of Atmel are granted by the Company in connection with the sale of Atmel products, expressly or by implication. Atmels products are  
not authorized for use as critical components in life support devices or systems.  
®
Marks bearing and/or are registered trademarks and trademarks of Atmel Corporation.  
Terms and product names in this document may be trademarks of others.  
Printed on recycled paper.  
1228A08/99/xM  

相关型号:

SI9130DB

5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous Converters

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1-E3

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9135_11

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9136_11

Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9130CG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9130LG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9130_11

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9137

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9137DB

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY